You are on page 1of 219

  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : 15 /8 /2013 Week 1 Date of teaching : / 8 / 2013
Period 1: HƯỚNG DẪN HỌC .
A-The aims and objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the book Tieng Anh 6
- book map
- Parts of a unit
- How to study vocab , stucture.
- The importance of English
B- Preparations:
1/ Teacher: Text book, lesson plan, ...
2/ Students: Textbooks, notebooks, reference books...
C- Procedures:
I/ Organization: (2') - Greeting
- Checking attendance
II/ Warm-up: (5')
T: Chatting : Ask ss some questions in Vietnamese
+ What is the weather like today ?
+ How do you feel about this new school ?
+ Do you like English?
Ss: Answer

III/ New lesson: (35')


I. Giới thiệu chương trình Tiếng Anh 6
1. Mục tiêu môn học :
- Học sinh có thể n¾m ®îc kiÕn thøc c¬ b¶n tèi thiÓu vµ t¬ng ®èi hÖ thèng vÒ TiÕng Anh
thùc hµnh hiÖn ®¹i.
- Cã kü n¨ng c¬ b¶n sö dông tiÕng Anh nh mét c«ng cô giao tiÕp ®¬n gi¶n duíi c¸c d¹ng
nghe, nãi, ®äc, viÕt.
- Cã sù hiÓu biÕt kh¸i qu¸t vÒ v¨n hãa c¸c níc sö dông TiÕng Anh.
2. §Æc ®iÓm m«n häc
- Xoay quanh 6 chñ ®iÓm lín:
+ You and me + Nature
+ Education + Recreation
+ Community + People and places
II. Giíi thiªu s¸ch TiÕngAnh 6
1. CÊu tróc s¸ch
- Cã 16 ®¬n vÞ bµi häc ( 16 Units)
- Mçi ®¬n vÞ bµi häc gåm 3 phÇn A,B,C

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Sau 3 bµi häc cã 1 phÇn Grammar Practice vµ 1 bµi kiÓm tra 45’
- Cuèi s¸ch lµ phÇn tæng kÕt ng÷ ph¸p vµ tõ v÷ng c¶ n¨m häc
2. Ph©n phèi ch¬ng tr×nh
- C¶ n¨m: 3 tiÕt x 35 tuÇn = 105
- Häc kú I: 3 tiÕt x 18 tuÇn = 54 tiÕt
- Häc kú II: 3 tiÕt x 17 tuÇn = 51 tiÕt
III. Giíi thiÖu c¸ch häc TiÕng Anh
1. Trªn líp:
- TrËt tù l¾ng nghe gi¸o viªn gi¶ng bµi, h¨ng h¸i ph¸t biÓu ý kiÕn.
- RÌn luyÖn vµ giao tiÕp b»ng TiÕng Anh trong giê häc TiÕng Anh, h¹n chÕ sö dông
TiÕng ViÖt.
- M¹nh d¹n ph¸t ©m chuÈn, thùc hµnh nãi nhiÒu.
2. Häc ë nhµ
- Häc bµi cò: häc tõ vùng, ng÷ ph¸p cña bµi häc tríc.
- §äc l¹i bµi khãa nhiÒu lÇn ®Ó nhí tõ vùng.
- Tù lÊy vÝ dô sö dông cÊu tróc ng÷ ph¸p ®· häc.
- Lµm nhiÒu bµi tËp n©ng cao.
- ChuÈn bÞ bµi häc tiÕp theo. (Tra tõ vùng cña bµi häc, ®äc tríc bµi häc ph¸t triÓn 4 kü
n¨ng: nghe, nãi, ®äc, viÕt)
- Giao tiÕp víi kh¸ch níc ngoµi nÕu cã c¬ héi.
IV/ Consolidation:(1' )
-T: Ask ss to retell some important notes.
Ss: Answer
V/ Homework(2')
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 20 Date of teaching : / / 20
Date of preparation : 15 /8 /2013 Date of teaching : / 8 / 2013
Period 2: HƯỚNG DẪN HỌC VÀ KIỂM TRA ĐẦU NĂM

I. MỤC TIÊU CHUNG CỦA MÔN HỌC TIẾNG ANH


- H×nh thµnh vµ ph¸t triÓn ë häc sinh nh÷ng kiÕn thøc, kü n¨ng c¬ b¶n vÒ TiÕng Anh vµ
nh÷ng phÈm chÊt trÝ tuÖ cÇn thiÕt ®Ó tiÕp tôc häc hoÆc ®i vµo cuéc sèng lao ®éng.
II. MỤC TIÊU CỤ THỂ
- Häc xong THCS , HS n¾m ®îc kiÕn thøc c¬ b¶n , tèi thiÓu vµ t¬ng ®èi hÖ thèng vÒ
TiÕng Anh thùc hµnh hiÖn ®¹i, phï hîp løa tuæi.
- Cã kü n¨ng c¬ b¶n sö dông T.Anh nh mét c«ng cô giao tiÕp ®¬n gi¶n díi c¸c d¹ng : Nghe
- nãi - ®äc – viÕt.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Cã sù hiÓu biÕt kh¸i qu¸t vÒ v¨n ho¸ cña c¸c níc sö dông TiÕng Anh.
- H×nh thµnh c¸c kü n¨ng häc tiÕng vµ ph¸t triÓn t duy .Nh÷ng kü n¨ng nµy sÏ gióp ph¸t
triÓn kh¶ n¨ng sö dông tiÕng mÑ ®Î vµ gãp phÇn h×nh thµnh n¨lùc ng«n ng÷ toµn diÖn
h¬n cho häc sinh.
III . CÁCH HỌC
- Häc ®i ®«i víi hµnh, ch¨m chØ häc tËp
- §äc, nãi TiÕng Anh râ rµng, chÝnh x¸c, ®óng träng ©m.
- ViÕt râ rµng, liÒn nÐt, ®óng chÝnh t¶.
- KÕt hîp ho¹t ®éng trªn líp vµ lµm bµi tËp ë nhµ vµ giao tiÕp víi mäi ngêi trong thùc tÕ.
- Cã kÜ n¨ng c¬ b¶n sö dông TiÕng Anh nh mét c«ng cô giao tiÕp ë møc ®é ®¬n gi¶n díi
d¹ng: nghe- nãi- ®äc- viÕt.
* Gi¸o viªn giíi thiÖu víi häc sinh mét sè c©u giao tiÐp b»ng TiÕng Anh thêng dïng trong
mçi tiÕt häc.
1/ Kieán thöùc :
Naém vöõng kieán thöùc cô baûn toái thieåu vaø töông ñoái heä thoáng veà tieáng Anh
thöïc haønh hieän ñaïi.
2/ Kó naêng :
a. Kó naêng nghe :
Nghe söû duïng tieáng Anh trong lôùp.Nghe hieåu tieáng Anh veà caùc chuû ñieåm
b. Kó naêng noùi:
Thöïc hieän caùc yeâu caàu giao tieáp haøng ngaøy baèng tieáng Anh trong vaø ngoaøi
lôùp,
Dieãn ñaït caùc noäi dung giao tieáp haøng ngaøy baèng tieáng Anh .
c. Kó naêng ñoïc :
Ñoïc hieåu noäi dung chính caùc ñoaïn vaên ngaén , ñôn giaûn veà caùc chuû ñieåm
ñaõ hoïc trong chöông trình.
d. Kó naêng vieát :
Vieát vaên mieâu taû hoaëc baùo caùo töôøng thuaät veà caùc hoaït ñoäng cuûa caù
nhaân hoaëc trong lôùp, trong khuoâng khoå noäi dung chöông trình.
Vieát ñeå phuïc vuï nhu caàu giao tieáp .
3/ thaùi ñoä tình caûm :
Coù thaùi ñoä vaø tình caûm ñuùng ñaén ñoái vôùi ñaát nöôùc , con ngöôøi , neàn vaên
hoaù vaø ngoân ngöõ ñang hoïc.
Bieát caùch töï hoïc ñeå naém vöõng vaø söû duïng tieáng nöôùc ngoaøi trong hoïc
taäp vaø trong ñôøi soáng.
Xaây döïng vaø phaùt trieån yù thöùc cuõng nhö naêng löïc laøm vieäc coäng ñoàng.
IV. HÖÔÙNG DAÃN :
1/ Veà saùch giaùo khoa :

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Hoïc sinh caàn coù moät saùch giaùo khoa tieáng Anh lôùp 6 vaø saùch baøi taäp tieáng
Anh ( workbook )
2/ Phöông phaùp hoïc :
Ngaøy nay khi hoïc moät ngoaïi ngöõ ngöôøi ta nghó ngay ñeán phöông phaùp giao
tieáp :
NGHE – NOÙI – ÑOÏC – VIEÁT
Trong caùc tieát hoïc caùc em phaûi heát söùc taäp trung nghe ( nghe baêng , nghe thaày
coâ, nghe baïn ) coá gaéng baét chöôùc ñuùng aâm, ñuùng ngöõ ñieäu khi laäp laïi, khi
noùi caán noùi to, töï nhieân, roõ raøng kó naêng ñoïc vieát seõ ñöôïc höôùng daãn daàn.
- Keep silent. Do you know? / Understand? Sit down,please stand up ,please
- May I go out?
- May I come in?
- Thank you./ Ok.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 15 /8 / 2013 Date of teaching : / 8 / 2013
UNIT 1: GREETING
Period 3. Lesson 1: Hello (A1-A4)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of the lessson, students will be able to use the greetings and
introduce about their names.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude: Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, my, name, is.
2. Grammar: To be: - I am + tên.
- My name is + tên
C. Teaching aids: book, notebook, pictures, cassette
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: no
3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

students’ activities +contents
(blackboard)
Warm up 5’
+ Who's absent today? -Ss answer the questions individually.
+ What's the date?
+ How are you?
Presentation 15’
1. Pre Teach Vocabulary
-- Open the book, please. 1. New words:
And look at the picture: - Hello: Xin chào
+ Who are they in the picture? - Hi:
+ What are they doing? - I: Tôi
- Ask them look at the pictures in in part 1. - Am <- Tobe (v): Thì, là
+ can you guess what the students say? - Is <- Tobe (v)
- Listen to the tape, please. - My: Của tôi
( 2 times) - Name (n): Tên
* Say the greetings: Hello/ Hi. - Some students read.
+ Who can read? - Listen and write down.
2. Grammar 2. Model sentences:
- Notice the main stress: - I am Lan.
Hello - My name is Lan.
Hi * Notice: I am = I'm
* Explain two ways of greetings Hello and Hi. My name is = My name's
- Who can say " Hello/ Hi" to your classmates? Listen to the teacher and answer in
Vietnamese.
Comprehension check: 10’ 3.Practice:
+ What do you say when you want to introduce a. I am ……………..
about your name? Look at the pictures in part 3, b. My name is …………..
please.
- Listen to the tape, please.
(2 times)
+ Who can read ?
+ Who can practice?
Practice: 10’
- Now you practice with the greetings and
introducing your names.
+ Who can practice?
- Give them study cards and ask them to do in 2

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

minutes. - Practice in pairs
.Answer key.
+ who can read the correct answer? a. I am Mai.
- Give answer key. b. My name is Hoa.
Remember: 3’ c. My name is Nam.
+ Who can repeat the main contents of the d. I am Lan.
lesson?

4. Remember:
- Hello
- Hi
Homework: 2’ - I am ………….
- My name is ……………
- I am = I'm
- My name is = My name's
6. Homework:
- Learn by heart the new words.
- Do exercices 1,2 / 4 in workbook.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 1. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : 15 /8 /2013 Week 2 Date of teaching : / 8 / 2013


UNIT 1: GREETING
Period 4. Lesson 2: Hello (A5-A7)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: In this lessson, students are going to learn how to ask
about the health and say "Thank you" Then they can practice with their classmates.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude: Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: : you, How, fine, thanks, thank you, are, Miss/ Mrs/ Mr
2. Grammar: + How are you?
- I'm fine, thanks.
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures, cassette,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:- Call 2 students go to the board.
S1: Does exercise 1 S2: Does execise 2
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

students’ activities +contents
(blackboard)
Warm up 5’
+ Who's absent today? -Ss answer the questions individually.
+ What's the date?
+ How are you?
+ Did you prepare the old lesson?
Presentation 15’
1. Pre Teach Vocabulary 1. New words:
Elicit from Sts. - Listen to the T.
Open the book, please. - Play in two groups.
And look at the picture: fine (a): khoÎ
+ Who are they in the picture? thank (v): c¸m ¬n
+ What are they doing? miss (n): c« (trÎ)
+ can you guess what they say when they want Mr (n): «ng
to ask about the health? Mrs (n): bµ, c« (cã gia ®×nh)
- Listen to the tape, please.
( 2 times)
+ Who can read the dialogue? - Listen and give the answers.
+ Who can find out the new words? - Listen and repeat then copy
- Explain the meaning of new words. - Some students read.
- fine (a): khoÎ - Listen and write down.
- thank (v): c¸m ¬n
- miss (n): c« (trÎ)
- Mr (n): «ng
- Mrs (n): bµ, c« (cã gia ®×nh)
* Check voacb: Slap the board. 2. Model sentences:
2. Grammar: * Ask and answer about the health:
Teacher introduce model sentences to ss about + How are you?
health - I'm fine, thanks. And you?
- I'm fine, thank you.
* Concept check:- Meaning.
- Form: How are you?

Practice (15’)
* Rub out and remember dialogue.
- T. gives instruction.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

I’m (fine). Thanks.
*T. puts A5-P.12 on the board and crosses out - Use: Hái th¨m søc khoÎ.
some key words. 3.Practice:
* Make sure sts have to remember the rubbed  Ba Lan
out words and keep practising the dialogue.
- Get sts to practise reading. Ba:…, Lan.
- Ask sts to fill the missing words. Lan:….….
* A6: Ba:… … you?
- T. sets the scene: this is Miss Hoa, Mr Hung. Lan:… fine….
They are talking each other. … …?
T. models: Ba: …,thanks.
* Get sts to practise.
* A7: Mr Hung: Hi, ( Miss Hoa)
- Play the tape.( 2 times) Miss Hoa: Hello, ( Mr Hung)
- Get sts to write the information they’re Mr Hung: How are you?
listened themselves to complete the dialogue. Miss Hoa: I’m fine, thanks. And you?
- Check with the w.c. Mr Hung: Fine, thanks.
Producion (7’) - Pronunciation.
Pre- teach number:
Elicit from Sts.
six eight ten
seven nine.
-Check vocab: Matching.
* Practice: Dictation:
- T. reads some telephone numbers: .Answer key.
8200294; 9504423; 720909; six eight ten
7683045 seven nine.
-Get some sts to go to the board and write them.
- Check with the w.c ( T. reads).
Homework: 3’
- Learn by heart the new words.
- Make the question and answer the question
about the health.
- Do exercices 3, 4/ 5 in workbook.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


4. Homework:
- Learn by heart the new words.
- - Do exercices 3, 4/ 5 in workbook.

E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /8 / 2013 Date of teaching : / 8 / 2013
UNIT 1: GREETING
Period 5. Lesson 3: Good morning (B1-B4)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: In this lessson, students are going to learn how to say the greetings in the
morning/ afternoon/ evening and say "goodbye".
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude: Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: morning, afternoon, evening, goodbye, good night, children, we.
2. Grammar: + How are you?
- I'm fine, thanks.
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures, cassette,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:- Call 2 students go to the board.
S1: write how to ask and answer about the health on the bb. And then read aloud.
S2: write numbers from 6 to 10 and then read aloud.
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
T corrects and gives marks
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1.Presentation (10ms)
+ Pre teach: Present these vocabulary: -Listen and repeat in chorus and

Good morning:Chào(Buổi sáng)-picture individually


-visual Copy down

Good afternoon:Chào(Buổi chiều) )- picture


Good everning:Chào(Buổi tối) )- explaination
Good night:Chúc ngủ ngon- Meaning- trans Work individually

Good bye:Chào tạm biệt( Mine- Situation) -Go to the board and write down.

Children:Trẻ em( picture- visual)


We: (pro) chúng tôi,chúng tớ, chúng ta(ngôi 1
- work in pairs
số nhiều- situation)ơ-
+Checking: R & R.
2.Practice:(5ms)( B1,2(14,15)
- Ss listen.
*:T elicits 5 pictures B1& helps Ss practise
-Read in chorus, Half – half, T- Ss,
greeting one another in pairs. groups of table or groups of 3.
Eg: S1- Good morning ! S2- Good
morning ! Picture drill. -Work in pairs
-T runs through the pictures. Example Exchange:
S1: Good (morning)
S2: Good (morning)

- Ss translate dialogue in to
vietnamese

*B3(P15)(5ms):Presentation dialogue - T sets


the scene: Miss Hoa is talking to her Ss.
T helps Ss read dialogue (a) P 15 in chorus, T-
-Work in pairs following example
wc, S-S,Groups of 3,or groups of table… exchange:
-T asks Ss to translate dialogue in to vietnamese S1: Seven and eight?
(Note:We are = We’re).
*B4(P16) (4ms)*Practice:T sets the scene: Lan
meets Nga when she goes to school.
*.Practice:(6ms)- T elicits numbers from 11 to

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

15 S2: Fifteen
+Word cues drill :Run through the cues, asks *keys:
Ss calculate & give result s.Let’s practise in + Nga: Good afternoon,Lan.
+ Nga: I’m fine, thanks
pairs.
-T gets feedback .
Eleven: 11 / Twelve: 12 / Thirteen: 13 - Practice in pairs.
Fourteen:14 / Fifteen: 15 9+2 - Listen and repeat in chorus
10 + 2
7+8 - Ss work individually to read
numbers from 0 to 15 in the
7+5 following ways:
5+
6+8 6
+ oh,one,two,three..
+ oh, two,four,six…
3.Further practice:(5ms) + one, three,five,seven…
+Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve, two,
five, thirteen, eight, eleven, four,fourteen,
seven, ten, fifteen, one, three, oh, nine
Consolidation:(2ms): Ss listen and write. Work individually.
- Asks Ss sums up the main contents of the
lesson: “ to great one another, numbers from 0
to 15”
.Homework:(1ms):
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers
0-15 & vocabulary.
-Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework
book).Prepare for next lesson.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /8 / 2013 Date of teaching : / 8 / 2013
UNIT 1: GREETING
Period 6. Lesson 4: How old are you (C1-C2)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to use “How old are you? I’m …” to talk about
ages, count & write numbers from 16 to 20

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1. Knowledges:
To present: -“How old are you” to talk about age and contrast with “How are you”
-Number 16 to 20
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude: Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary:Sixteen, Seventeen,Eighteen, Nineteen,Twenty
2. Grammar: How old are you? I am (12) years old
C. Teaching aids: posters,picture cues,Cards.cassette,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:- Call 2 students go to the board.
S1: write vocabulary on board. eight
- T asks other Ss to write numbers: network three
* Keys: + vocabulary of last lesson. Numbe
rs
+ Numbers: one, two,three,… four 0-15 one
- T corrects and gives marks. eleven (…)
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
T corrects and gives marks
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
1.Presentation (10ms)
+ Pre teach: Listen and repeat in chorus and works

Present numbers: individially

Sixteen: 16 / Seventeen: 17 Copy down

Eighteen: 18 / Nineteen: 19 / Twenty: 20


- Retell the numbers from 0 to 15.
+Checking: Slap the boarb.
* C3(P18): Work individially

+ Presentation: -T sets the scene: Nga & Lan


meet their teacher, Mrs Hoa.Ba meets Phong 1 st -Go to the boarb and write down

time.
- Ss listen to the dialogue and read silently.
T helps Ss practise dialogue : T-S; Ss-Ss;
pairs…

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

-T gives instructions.
Teacher contrast with “ How are you?”
*Model sentence:
How old are you? -Ss play the game with two teams.
I am (12) years old
-T concept check meaning, form… - Translate in to Vietnamese .
2.Practice:(20ms) -Work in pairs
a)Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner.
-Work in group to find the words with the
A B C
D number
Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty
a b c d e
16 17 18 19 20 -Work in pairs to ask and answer the
* Practice: questions

- Word cue drill.


T runs through the cues.
16 17 18 19 20…
-T models: T: How old are you?
S: I’m /12/ -Write the number after listening.
-T helps Ss practise speaking :T-Ss;Ss- -Work in individially
Ss;pairs...
- Listen and repeat in chorus.
3.Further practice:(8ms:)
*C5 P. 19
-T guides Ss to play: “bingo”(Number 0-20)
Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6/ 8, 11,13, 15, 0/
16, 12, 1, 17, 3/ 5,4,2,18,15/ …..
-T finds out the winner.
- Ss practise speaking:
-Let Ss draw a square with numbers: 0-
half- hafl; pairs, T-Ss…individually.
20.
Consolidation:(2ms)
- T sums up the main contentsof the
lesson.
- Remember the numbers & ways to talk
about the ages

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Homework:(2ms)
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20.
- How to ask and answer about ages
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
Duyê ̣t tuần 2. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : /8 /2013 WEEK 3 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013


UNIT 1: GREETING
Period 7. Lesson 5: How old are you? (C3-C5)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges:By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask the age of people
and introduce others.
To introduce the students the way of asking the age and introduing others
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: : Old, Year,This
2. Grammar: +This is…. + How are you? + I am…..
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:- Call 2 students go to the board.
S1: Asking him /her to introduce his /her name and his friend’s name
S2: Asking him /her to introduce his /her name and his friend’s name
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
I.Presentation : (25’)
Presentation of c4 :
T gets ss to remind how to use asking about the Example exchange :
age ,the health and say difference between S1 How old are you ?
:How old are you? and :How are you? S2 I’m ten
T gets ss to count 0-20 ……….
Bingo
T gives the instruction : each of you writes
down three numbers .If one who has three
numbers I read is the winner .
Dictation and picture :

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Cue drill :
T reads the telephone numbers
T asks ss to listen and write down the telephone Ex :
numbers S1 What’s your numbers ?
0913473384 048210476 S2 oh five one one six nine six nine nine
0511869206 0510897415
*Presentation of c6:
t gets ss to complete the open dial Open dial :
T calls some ss to fill in the blanks Children …….. afternoon ,Mr Tan
T checks their mistakes Mr Tan : ……children ,……you ?
II.Practice: 10’ Children …..-…-…. You
Ask and answer about age Mr Tan : ……..Long
Feedback Mr Tan : oh ,Hello ,Long. How ….?
III.Production : Survey : 9’ Long : …eleven ….. …….
T gives the instruction Ex :
Name Telephone numbers S1 :What’s your name ?
1 Hoa 033612300 S2 :Hoa
2. Lan 5111896542 S1;What’s your telephone numbers ?
3.Mai 0510856987 S2 : [0511869206 ]
T calls some ss to check
IVHome work (1’)
Review numbers 0-20
Ask and answer the telephone numbers
Ask and answer about the name, age , health
Be ready for Unit 2( A1-4: Words) Home work :
Review numbers 0-20
Ask and answer the telephone numbers
Ask and answer about the name, age ,
health
Be ready for Unit 2( A1-4: Words).
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 8. Lesson 1: COME IN? (A1-A3)
A.Teaching aims:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1. Knowledges:Classroom imperatives to understand the teacher’s commands.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: (to) sit down >< (to) stand up, (to) open(your book) >< (to)close (your book)
2. Grammar: Commands
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up: Greeting.
2. Old lesson:
Ask Ss to go to the board and write the correct words from the jumbled words:
- eevsn= …. ;treniteh = ……;ntreenuof = ….etc….
6 ……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
1

3. New lesson:

students’ activities +contents


Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
I. Presentation:
*Pre teach: (to) come in.
(to) sit down. - Pre teach:
(to) open(your book). - (to) come in: đi vào
(to) close (your book). - (to) sit down > < (to) stand up
*Slap the board: Ask Ss to play the game in - (to) open (your book) > < (to) close
two teams. (your book)
*Presentation the text: A 1, p 20.
II. Practice:
*Matching: A2 , p 21: Ask Ss to look at the Slap the board:
pictures and match the pictures with the ®i vµo §øng lªn Më s¸ch
commands.Give feedback.
*Mime drill: T mimes and has Ss say the
commands.
*Simon says: A3 p 22:
Ask Ss to play the game “Simon says”.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

III.Further practice: ra
®ãng s¸ch l¹i ngåi xuèng
*Mapped dialogue:
Miss Hoa: Children:
(1)……..morning! (2)……. morning
(3)….How……? Miss Hoa.
(5)Fine......Sit…and (4)We’re…How..?
open ….. (6) Yes,Miss.
*Homework: Ex: 1, 2(p11,12) workbook
Answers
a, Open your book
b, Sit down
c, Come in.
d, Close your book.
e, Stand up.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 9. Lesson 1: Where do you live? (B1-B2)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use“ Where do you live?”
questions to talk about the places they live.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: live, you-your, I-my, Where, do
2. Grammar: Where do you live?I live on Tran Phu street
C. Teaching aids: book,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up: Greeting.
2. Old lesson:
Calls on one student to go to the board and write newwords
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities students’ activities +contents (blackboard)
I. Presentation:
*Pre teach: (to)live 1. Vocabulary:
(in) a house -(to) live (v): sống Translation
(on) a street (in) a house : (trong) căn nhà Drawing
(in) a city. - ( on ) a treet : trên đường phố. Visual
Ask Ss to match the words in English with ( in ) a city :ở thành phố. Picture
the words in Vietnamese. 2. Grammar:
*Presentation Dialogue: B1 (p23) *Model sentences:
Ask Ss to look at the picture and the A: Where do you live?
dialogue between the girl and Nam,read the B: I live on Tran Phu street
dialogue. in a house
*Model sentences: a city
A: Where do you live? Hue
B: I live on Tran Phu street Viet nam.
in a house =>Form: Where +do/does+ S+ V?
a city S+ V+ prep( in,on,at)+ place
Hue Use: Dùng để hỏi và trả lời về nơi sống của ai
Viet nam. đó.
II.Practice: 3.Practice:
*Wordcue drill: *Wordcue drill:
A, house A, house
B,city B,city
C,Ha noi C,Ha noi
D,Hung Vuong street D,Hung Vuong street
E,Le Loi street E,Le Loi street
F,HCM city F,HCM city
* Noughts and crosses: * Noughts and crosses:
A house (a) Danang A city (c) A house (a) Danang A city (c)
(b) (b)
A street (d) Donghoi(e) HCMc (f) A street (d) Donghoi(e) HCMc (f)
TP Long Hue (i) TP Long Hue (i)
Street(g) xuyen (h) Street(g) xuyen (h)
III.Production:
*Survey: Ask Ss to ask and answer then
fill in the table with the information from
their friends:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

5.*Survey
Name street city
Homework: Ex: 3, 4(p12+13)workbook

E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
Duyê ̣t tuần 3. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : /9 /2013 WEEK 4 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013


UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 10. Lesson 3: Where do you live? (B3-B5)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ What’ s your
names?” and “How do you spell it?”\questions to talk about their names.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: : teach the alphabets,to spell.
2. Grammar: How do you spell it?It’s B-I-N-H,Binh
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:
- Ask Ss to go to the board and write the answer to the question: “Where do you live?
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
I.Presentation : (25’)
A,Presentation:
Pre teach: the alphabet: a, b, c,d, e, f, g, h, i, j, Example exchange :
k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z. S1 How old are you ?
Ask Ss to play the game: “shark attack” S2 I’m ten
_ _ _ _ _ (house) ……….
_ _ _ _ _ _ (street)
_ _ _ _ (open)
_ _ _ _ _(close)
*Rub out and remember dialogue: B4
Give the model sentences:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

+What’s your name?
+How do you spell it?
B,Practice: Ex :
*Wordcue drill: S1 What’s your numbers ?
a.Tuan S2 oh five one one six nine six nine nine
b.Hai
c.Minh
d.Lan Open dial :
e.Mai Children …….. afternoon ,Mr Tan
….etc… Mr Tan : ……children ,……you ?
*Homework: Children …..-…-…. You
Ex: 2, 5(p12)workbook. Mr Tan : ……..Long
Mr Tan : oh ,Hello ,Long. How ….?
Long : …eleven ….. …….
Ex :
S1 :What’s your name ?
S2 :Hoa
S1;What’s your telephone numbers ?
S2 : [0511869206 ]

Home work :
Review numbers 0-20
Ask and answer the telephone numbers
Ask and answer about the name, age ,
health
Be ready for Unit 2( A1-4: Words).
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 11. Lesson 3: My school (C1)
A.Teaching aims: By the end of he lesson, Ss will be able to practice with “What’s this?/
What’s that?”- “It’s a/an....” to talk about names of things.
1. Knowledges: practice asking about names of things and the ways to answer them
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: that's = that is, school, class, desk, classroom...
2. Grammar: - Is this your desk? Yes, it is. (Yes, this/that is my desk.)
- Is that your teacher? Yes, that's my teacher.
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:
Call 2 Ss to write on the board and others work in pair to ask and answer about names of
things which they have learned. And then speak out
Eg: Is this/ that a/an/your…? -Yes./No.
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities students’ activities +contents (blackboard)
I.Presentation : (25’) 1.New words
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and guess a school (n): trường học
the meaning. class(n): lớp học
classroom(n): phòng học
that is =that: kia là
desk(n): bàn học sinh
2. Grammar
? What is this/ that?
- Play the tape – Ss listen and repeat (chorus It’s a/ an…….
and individual) Eg: S1: What is this/ that?
S2: It’s a door/ an eraser.
- Ask Ss to retell the way to ask and answer - Is this your desk?
the names of things Yes, it is. (Yes, this/that is my desk.)
- Is that your teacher?
Yes, that's my teacher.
* Practice 3. Practice
- Hang the table and guide Ss to play game W P E N S C E X
“Wordsquare” O E D D C L R D
Key: D N E O H O A R
" pen(s), ruler. N C S O O C S A
# window, board. I I K R O K E O
$ pencil, pen, desk, school, clock, eraser. W L R U L E R B
- Guide Ss to practice. Ss work in pair and
soeak out.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Call them to speak out and correct.

* Futher practice
- Give the situations and ask Ss to give the
sentences in real life.

4. Homewowk: (2’)
- Learn by heart the new words.
- Guide Ss to prepare: Period 12: A1,2
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 12. Lesson 4: My school (C2,3,4)
A.Teaching aims: By the end of he lesson, Ss will be able to practice with “What’s this?/
What’s that?”- “It’s a/an....” to talk about names of things.
1. Knowledges: practice asking about names of things and the ways to answer them
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: a school - bag, a pen, a pencil, a ruler, an eraser, a door, a window, a board,
a clock.
2. Grammar: What's this? What is that? - It's an/a ...
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: test 15 minutes
3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities students’ activities +contents (blackboard)
I.Presentation : (25’) 1.New words
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and guess
the meaning.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

a door (n) cửa ra vào
a window (n) cửa sổ
a board (n) cái bảng
a clock (n) cái đồng hồ
a school bag (n) că ̣p sách
- Play the tape – Ss listen and repeat (chorus a pencil (n) bút chì
and individual) a pen (n) bút mực
a ruler (n) thước kẻ
- Ask Ss to retell the way to ask and answer an eraser (n) cục tẩy
the names of things 2. Grammar
? What is this/ that?
It’s a/ an…….
* Practice Eg: S1: What is this/ that?
- Hang the table and guide Ss to play game S2: It’s a door/ an eraser.
“Wordsquare” 3. Practice
Key: W P E N S C E X
" pen(s), ruler. O E D D C L R D
# window, board. D N E O H O A R
$ pencil, pen, desk, school, clock, eraser. N C S O O C S A
- Guide Ss to practice. Ss work in pair and I I K R O K E O
soeak out. W L R U L E R B
- Call them to speak out and correct. II. C3: Practice with a partner.
Eg: S1: What is this/ that?
S2: It’s a waste basket/ an eraser.
Note: “an” before vowels (A, I, U, E, O)
* Futher practice “a” before consonants
- Give the situations and ask Ss to give the III. C4: Remember
sentences in real life. * ? What is this/ that?
It’s a/ an…….
Eg: S1: What is this/ that?
S2: It’s a door/ an eraser.
* This is……
That is ….
4. Homewowk: (2’)
- Learn by heart the new words.
- Guide Ss to prepare: Period 12: A1,2

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Eg: This is a class.
That is an eraser.
This is my class.
That is my eraser.

Test 15 minutes
Question
I.Hoaøn thaønh caùc caâu sau söû duïng “am / is / are” (4ms)
1. My name …….. Nam.
2. I ……… a student.
3. How ………you ? => I’m fine, thanks.
4. ……… that your teacher ? => Yes, that is my teacher.
II. Vieát thaønh caùc caâu hoaøn chænh töø nhöõng töø hoaëc cuïm töø cho
saün(6ms)
1. is / teacher / my / That=> ………………………………………………………………
2. / your / name / is /What ?………………………………………………………………
3. do / Where / live / you ? ………………………………………………………………
Answers:
I.Hoaøn thaønh caùc caâu sau söû duïng “am / is / are” (4ms)
1. is 2. am 3. are 4. is
II. Vieát thaønh caùc caâu hoaøn chænh töø nhöõng töø hoaëc cuïm töø cho saün(6ms)
1.That is my teacher.
2.What is your name ?
3. Where do you live?
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 4. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : /9 /2013 WEEK 5 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013


UNIT 3: AT HOME
Period 13. Lesson 1: My house? (A1-A2)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: Help the students to ask and answer using WH questions with THIS
and THAT about the things in the room .
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: things in the livingroom.
2. Grammar: Simple present tense , What is this/ What is that ?What are these?/ What are those?
And the answers It is a.../an...or They are ...
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:
- Ask Ss to go to the board and write the answer to the question
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
+ Pre- teach: Vocabulary I. Presentation
- using the pictures on P.31 for eliciting new 1. Vocabulary
Vocab - a lamp: c¸i ®Ìn
- T teaches Ss to read Vocab - a bookshelf: gi¸ s¸ch
- Ss read the Vocab chorally then - a chair : ghÕ tùa
individually - a couch : ghÕ sa l«ng dµi
=>Checking Vocab :Slap the board - an armchair: ghÕ bµnh

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

+ Presentation text A2/P.31 - a table: bµn lµm viÖc
- Elicit from the Ss to give the model - a clock: ®ång hå
sentences - a stereo: ®µi
- Ss read the model sentences chorally then - a telephone: ®iÖn tho¹i
in pairs(open Pairs) - a living room: phßng kh¸ch
+ Concept check - a stool: ghÕ ®Èu
- Meaning: 2. Model sentences
(? Who can translate the model sentences in What is this ? It is a table
to Vietnamese? What is that? It is a chair
Ss: Answer What are these? They are stools
- “Form” What are those? They are armchairs

(?)Who can give me the form? * Form:


Ss: answer 1. What is this/that?
(?) When do we use the first structure and It is+ a/an + N
the second structure? 2. What are these/those?
Ss: answer They are + N(s,es)
T explains the way to form plural Nouns * Use:
Hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ 1 vËt ë gÇn/ xa
m×nh
Hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ nhiÒu vËt ë gÇn/ xa
m×nh.
* Notes
+ How to form plural Nouns:
- Thªm “s” vµo sau danh tõ sè Ýt
Eg: table – tables
chair – chairs
Tuy nhiªn
-T guides Ss how to pronounce the final ‘-S” couch- couches
Ss pronounce examples after the teacher person- people
+ How to pronounce the final “s”
2. Practice Cã 3 c¸ch ph¸t ©m –“s”
+ Picture drill A2/P.31 /-s/: khi theo sau ©m/p,t,k,f, /
- Ask Ss to run through the questions and Eg: books, maps
then the answers /-iz/: khi theo sau ©m/s,z,s,t ,d ,z/
- Ask Ss to Practice the questions and then Eg: classes, watches
the answers /-z/: khi theo sau c¸c ©m cßn l¹i
Ss work in groups Eg: pens, tables.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1/2 of class: ask II. Practice
1/2 of class: answer Example Exchange
à Exchange S1: What is this? / that?
+ Ss work in pairs S2: It’s a/an.....
(open pairs- closed pairs) S1: What are those/these?
- Have Ss ask and answer about things S2: They are....
around the class III .Further Practice Example:
- Ss work in pairs ( open pairs- closed pairs) S1: What is this?
T guides Ss to do the homework S2: It is a board
IV. Home work
1. Learn to hear the Vocab
2..Do A1,2/P.17-18( exercise book)
4.PrepareA3,4).
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 3: AT HOME
Period 14. Lesson 2: My house? (A3-A4)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of he lesson, Ss will be able to use family vocabulary, know
names of objects in the home; ask and answer about the third person's name/age; introduces
about one's job ask and answer about quality.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: family vocabulary; family, father, mother, sister, brother and the pocessive
pronoun ; my, his, her, your...
2. Grammar: Simple present tense , Who is this/ that ? and the answers
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:
Call 1 S to write new words about items in the house on the board and others work in pair
to ask and answer about them. And then speak out
Eg: - What’s that? What’s your name?
- It’s a clock My name’s Hoa

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
* Presentation I.A3: Listen and repeat. Then practice.
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and guess the 1.New words
situations Father (n) Bố
- Explain the meaning of the new words. Mother (n) Mẹ
Brother (n) Anh / em trai
Sister (n) Chị / em gái
Family (n) Gia đình
People (n) Người
How many (adj) Bao nhiêu
His (adj) Củaanh/chú/bác/ôn
g...ấy.
Her Của
- Eplain the form sentences and ask Ss to chị/cô/bác/bà...ấy
practice them in real situations. 2. Grammar
1) Ask and answer about quantity.
Eg:
- How many people are there in your
family?
- There are 4 people in my family.
- There is one
How many + Ns + are there + pre...
There is + a /an + N + pre...
There are + some + Ns...
number
2) Ask and answer about the third person's
name.
Eg: ? What is her name?
Her name is Nga.
? What is his name?

* Practice
- Play the tape – Ss listen and repeat

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Call on some Ss to read. His name is Ha.
What is his / her name?
- Introduce the pictures and questions His / Her name is + name.
- Guide Ss to answer. 3) Too
- Call 2Ss to write the answer in the board and Eg: He is a teacher.
others speak out. She is a teacher, too.
- Correct. 3. Practice
- Listen and repeat
* Futher practice - Read
- Give Ss to answer by themself in real life.
II. A4: Answer the questions.
* Who is this / that?
- Guide Ss to practice with real situstions and It is + name.
call them to speak out. Who is he / she?
He / she is + name.
4. Homewowk: (2’) a. Her name is Nga
- Learn by heart the new words and make up b. His name is Ha
example with structures in A6. c. It is Ba
- Guide Ss to prepare Period 1 He is 12
d. It is Lan
She is 15

E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 3: AT HOME
Period 15. Lesson 3: Numbers? (B1-B2)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of he lesson, Ss will be able to count from 21 to 100 and know
how to pronounce plural nouns.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: Numbers and nouns.
2. Grammar: Simple present tense : There is... / There are...
+ Noun ( singular and flural nouns )

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

C. Teaching aids: book, pictures,easytalk.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:
Call 1 S to write new words about items in the house on the board and others work in pair
to ask and answer about them. And then speak out
Eg: - What’s that? What’s your name?
- It’s a clock My name’s Hoa
1 2
6 ……………………………………….6 :………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
* Presentation I Presentation:
- Hang the side board – Ss look at them. Vocabulary
- Play the tape – Ss listen and repeat - thirty: 30
- forty: 40
- fifty: 50
- sixty one: 61
- Play the tape – Ss listen and repeat (chorus - seventy six: 76
and individual) - eighty two: 82
- ninety nine: 99
- one hundred: 100
* Practice - one hundred and one: 101
- Guide Ss to count and read them in the II. Practice
classroom. 1. Look at the poster and answer the
- Explain the structure in real situations. questions
- Call them to read the items and correct. a. 10 d..40 g.70 j.100
b.20 e.50 h.80
- Explain the way to change from single nouns c.30 f.60 i.90
into plural nouns and read.

2. Count the item in the classroom.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


- Guide Ss to count the items in the class and


call them to speak out. Example statements
S1: There is one door
- Gets Ss to repeat structure, which is used to S2: There are [three] windows
ask and answer about quantity.
- Get them to give examples.
- Let Ss listen and repeat.
- Call some pairs to ask and answer with
sentences that they have heard.
III. Further pratice
- Get Ss to practice about the items in the Listen and write them in the correct
livingroom in pairs. columns
- Call some pairs to ask and answer loudly. /s/ /z/ /z/
Desk Rulers Benches
* Futher practice Students Tables Couches
- Guide Ss to practice the structuce and words Books Doors Houses
in real situations. Clocks Window
- Ask Ss to work in pair and call them to speak lamps
out.
- Correct. III. Homework
1. Learn by hear the Vocab
2. Do B1,2/P.21 ( exercise book)
3. Do B4/P.18 (exercise notebook)
4. Prepare : B3,5
- B1/.P21: Write the answers in words
Eg: a. 10 + 5 = fifteen
b. 40: 2 = twenty

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- B2/P.21 Write the plurals of the words
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 5. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : /9 /2013 WEEK 6 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013


UNIT 3: AT HOME
Period 16. Lesson 4: Numbers? (B3-B6)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: Help the students to count things.And kow how to change from singular
nouns to flural nouns..
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: Numbers and nouns. Review things at home and at school.
2. Grammar: Grammar: Simple present tense : How many ... are there .There is... /
There are...

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: Ask Ss to go to the board and write the answer to the question
6 ……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
1

3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
+ Pre- teach: Vocabulary I. Presentation:
- Lead in : - How many people are there in your
- What are there in this class room ? family ?
- How many doors / windows ... are there? - How many people are there in your
In order to know that we continue unit 3 class ?
- Have Ss listen and answer the questions. + There is .....
+ There are .....
- Have the Ss listen and repeat. - List the things you see in the picture -
The classroom (P36)
- Ask the Ss to list the things and count the - a board
items. -
- How many boards are there in the room
- Have the Ss ask and answer . ?
There is one/ (There a two)
II. Practice:
Practice with the parteners.
- Have the Ss pairwork - Use the picture , count the picture the
living room (p 37)
+ How many... are there?
- There is/are .......
- Have the Ss count to ask and + Note: how to pronoun flural nouns
- Nouns have S
answer. / s/ Go after voiless consonants.(F,K,P,T )
/z/ Go after cosonants and vowels.
- Nouns have ES
/iz/ Go with the nouns have the ending
S,SH,CH, Z,X,G,E.
- Explaining how to change the singular /z/ Go after the ending I,V.O.
noun into flural noun, and how to pronoun - Listen and complete:
them. /s/ /z/ /iz/

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

books chairs couches
......... ........... .............
III. Production:
- Practice in class
Your class:- a board
- ten desks
- Have the Ss listen and put the nouns to - four windowns
the right columns. Questions:- How many ...?
IV. Homework:
- Have the Ss ask and answer in class with - Learn vocabulary by heart.
the model: HOW MANY ...? - Practice to ask and answer about things
in the room
- Learn how to change the singular noun
- Have the Ss to do homework to flural noun
- Prepare unit 3 C1-2
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 3: AT HOME
Period 17. Lesson 5: Families? (C1-2)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about Lan’s family, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about jobs.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: engineer, doctor, nurse
2. Grammar: + What does he/she do? - He/she is a teacher/an engineer.
+ What do you/they do? - I’m a student / They are students
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:Questions: -T shows the picture of C1(38) and asks Ss to answer the Qs.
1.How many tables are there?/.2.How many armchairs are there?
3.How ……? / 4.How many people …?
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

3. New lesson: In last lesson, We learned the way to make questions and answer with “
How many + N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are..”. Today, we are going read the text about
Lan’s family
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
*Revision(3ms) - Listening to the words.
+Write it up: From survey lesson 4 - Repeat in chorus then in individual.
Ask students to talk : “There are/ is......”
1.Pre- reading:(12ms)
1.Pre- reading:(12ms)
+Pre teach(Vocabulary):
+Pre teach(Vocabulary):
(an) engineer(picture): kĩ sư
(an) engineer(picture): kĩ sư
(a) doctor (picture):bác sĩ
(a) doctor (picture):bác sĩ
(a) nurse (picture):Y tá
(a) nurse (picture):Y tá
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
-Copying the words.
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Working in individual to find out the jobs
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects & comparing in pairs.
the mistakes. - Giving the information & correcting.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. Working in pairs to guess about Lan’s
-Introduces the requirement (luat)& ask Ss to family:
work in individual to find out the jobs. How old.....?
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs. What does he/ she do?
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments. 2. Open prediction
2/C1(p38): Reading C1 P.38 to check their predictions
a)Open prediction:Asks Ss look at the
picture C1 & guess information to fill in the Lan|s family
table: How old..? What does he/she
Lan|s family do?
How old..? What does he/she
do?

Father 40 an engineer
Mother 35 a teacher

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Brother 8 a student
Lan Father 40 an engineer
- T gets feedback. Mother 35 a teacher
3.While reading(20ms) Brother 8 a student
– Asks Ss listen to the disc Lan
Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their
predictions.
+Noughts and crosses: 3. Comprehension questions:
T asks questions from a) to h) in C1 P.38 a)How many books are there in Lan|s living
b) Comprehension questions: room?
-Asks Ss read the text again & answer the Qs - There are four people in her family
in pairs. Working in groups to ask and anwer the
-Gets feedback question in C1 P.38
Eg: a)How many books are there in Lan |s
living room? - Repeat in chorus then in individual.
- There are four people in her family - Making sentences for the next cues.
c) Hỏi và trả lời về nghề nghiệp:
*T models: + What does he/she do? - Play agame: noughts and crosses.
- He/she is a teacher/an engineer.
a b c
+ What do you/they do? d e f
- I’m a student / They are students g h i
*.Post reading:(7ms)
– Talk about song’s family. 4. Hỏi và trả lời về nghề nghiệp:
+Word cue drill: C2 P.39. - Practicing in groups & in pairs .
(T runs through the family as C1). - Correcting the pronunciation.
- Asks Ss look at the family tree(p39).
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps * Keys:
Ss to practice. b) He is forty.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss c) He is an engineer
to repeat in chorus d) She is thirty five
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. e) She is a teacher
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in f) He is eight
groups & in pairs . g) He’s a student
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Transformation writing
IV.Consolidation:(1m)
– How to introduce about someone’s family.
How to ask and answer about jobs.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Check the form : “How many......? - There h) They are in the livingroom.
is/are....”
V.Homework:(1m) *Eg: This is song’s family.There are four
- Learn by heart cabulary & structures of people in his family: his father;his
this lesson. mother;his sister and him.
- Do the exercse 3 P.22 in workbook. This is his father. He’s a doctor.He’s forty
- Prepare for next lesson. two years old.This is his mother. She’s a
nurse.She’s thirty nine.His sister is
fifteen.She’s a student.

-Ss to make sentences for the next


Ss transform the sentences in C1.P.38 with
the information in C2P.39 to write about
Song|s family
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : /9 /2013 Date of teaching : / 9 / 2013
UNIT 3: AT HOME
Period 18. Lesson 6: Grammar practice
A.Teaching aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use “to be”, imperative,
numbers from 0 to 100, Qs words( What / Where/ How/ How many…),“There is/There
are…” and furniture vocabulary.
1. Knowledges: Read and understand the text about Lan’s family, Ss will be able to ask
and answer questions about jobs.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: review
2. Grammar: review
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: Questions: -T shows the picture of C1(38) and asks Ss to answer the Qs.
1.How many tables are there?/.2.How many armchairs are there?
3.How ……? / 4.How many people …?
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

3. New lesson: In last lesson, We learned the way to make questions and answer with “
How many + N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are..”. Today, we are going read the text about
Lan’s family
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
Presentation and practice I- Tobe:
Activity 1: Tobe, imperative, questions S/ tobe Khẳn Phủ Nghi
words g định định vấn
1. Tobe *I  am S + S + be Be +
T: reminds the simple present tense with *We / you / be....... not....... S.... ?
“ tobe ” they/ Lan ...
Ss: listen and take note. and Nga 
T: asks Ss to complete exercises 1, 2, 3. are
Ss: do the tasks. *She / he / it
T: controls and corrects. / Nam  is
Ss: take note. Ex: She is a doctor.
2. Imperative => She is not a doctor.
T: Reviews the imperative => Is she a teacher ?
Ss : listen and complete the imperative. Yes, she is / - No, she isn’t.
T: Ask Ss to work in pairs to fill in each gaps * Exercise 1, 2,3/ p40
with a suitable word key- exercise 4/ 40 1- Am / am / are / is / are
Ss: Do the exercise. 2- Am/ is / is / are / are
3. Questions words 3-a) are / am b) is / is
T: ? How many question words have you c) is / isn’t d) are / aren’t
learnt? II- Imperative:
Ss: Answer and take note. a. in b. down c. your
T: asks Ss to fill in the blanks with the d. your e. up
questions words III- Question words:
Ss : fill in the blanks. + How, How old, How many, What,
Activity 2: numbers/ This and that Where...
T: asks Ss to write the words for the numbers * Exercise 6:
and the numbers for the words. a) What / is b) Where / live
Ss: do as requested. ( review numbers ) c) Who / is d) What / is
T: asks Ss to work in pairs to complete the
dialogues
Ss: work in pairs.
T: controls and corrects mistakes.
Ss: take note.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

T: reminds the way to use “this” and “that” IV- Numbers: Exe 7/ 42
Ss: complete the dialogue in pairs. a. five / eight / ten / twenty / thirty......
T: controls and corrects mistakes. b.7 ,9 ,11 , 15.... . .
Production V- This and That : Exe 9/ 42
T: Ask Sts to do some other exercises. a. Ba: What is that ? Is it a desk ?
Ss: Listen to the T. Do the exercises. Thu: Yes, it is.
T: Ask ss to give the answers and check if b. Ba: What is this? Is it a desk?
necessary. Thu: No, it isn’t.
Ss: Take note. Free practice:
IV/ Consolidation:(1-6' ) Exe 1: Supply the correct form of tobe
-T: Ask ss to retell the lesson. 1. I (be) a teacher. -> am
Ss: Answer. 2.We (be) doctors. -> are
T: Ask ss to do the task 3( for fair students) 3.They (be) in the living room? -> Are they
Exe 3: Make questions for the answers: 4. She (be) an engineer. -> is
1.I`m fine , thanks.  How are you? 5. He (not be) a student. -> isn’t
Exe 2: Arrange the words in order.
2.He is a student . ……………….
1.old/how/you/are ? => How old are you?
3.That is a ruler. ……………….. 2.many/ in / how/your class/ students/ are
4.Those are books .………………….. there?
5. There are four people in my family . => How many students are there in your
.............................................
class?
V/ Homework:(2')
3.is/my father/a/teacher.
- Ask Sts to do the exercises in the book .
=> My father is a teacher.
- Prepare for the test number 1.
4.are/in/we/our/room/living .
=> We are in our living room.
5.live/does/Where/ Hoa ? lives/ She/ Viet
Nam/ in .
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 6. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Hoàng Thế Hiến
Date of preparation : / / 20 Week 7 Date of teaching : / / 20
Period: 19 English Test - No 1
A. Mục tiêu: Học sinh cần đạt được các mục tiêu sau:
1. Từ vựng:
2. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ: Chia động từ Tobe và chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu.
3. Đọc hiểu: Đọc hiểu đoạn văn về gia đình Lan.
4. Viết: Viết câu theo chỉ dẫn.
B. Ma trận
Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng
Chủ đề
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Phonetic
&Pronuciation 4 (1,0) 4 (1,0)
L.Focus 8 (2,0) 5 (2,5) 13 (4,5)
Reading 5 (2,5) 5 (2,5)
Writing 4 (2,0) 4 (2,0)
Tổng 13 (4,5) 10 (3,5) 5 (2,5) 26 (10)
C. Chuẩn bị
Ra đề và phô tô đề kiểm tra
D. Nội dung :
ĐỀ I:
I.Khoanh tròn chữ cái trước từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn lại.(1,0
điểm)
1. A. hi B. children C.night D.fine
2. A. school B. classroom C.afternoon D.door
3. A.thanks B.that C. table D.stand up
4. A. eraser B. desk C.pen D.television
II.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0 điểm)
1. What’s your name? ……… name’s Linh.
a. My b. his c. her D.their
2. How are you? – I’m ……… thanks.
a. fine b. five c. good D.eleven
3. …….. do you live? – I live in Hue.
a. What b. Who c. Where D.How
4. What ……… this? – It’s a pen.
a. is b. am c. are d.
5. …….. are you? – I’m eleven.
a. How b. How old c. What D.How many

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

6. …………. does she do? – She’s a student.
a. Where b. Who c. What D.How
7.How do ……… spell your name?
A. he B. she C. they D. you
8. ………. people are there in my family?
a. How much b. How old c. How many D.How
III.Chia đô ̣ng từ tobe (am/is/are) chothích hợp (2,0 điểm)
1.How (be) …………….. you?
2.What (be)…………….that?
3.I (be ) ……………… a student
4.She (be)………………eleven years old.
IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (2,5 điểm)
There are four people in Lan’s family. Her father is thirty eight years old. He’s a
teacher . Her mother is thirty five years old. She’s a nurse . Her sister is twelve years old. She
is a student. Lan is ten years old.
1.How many people are there in her family ?
………………………………………………………………………………...............................
2. How old is her father ?
…………………………………………………...........................................................................
3.Is her mother a teacher ?
……………………………………………………………………………..............................
4. What does her sister do ?
………………………………………………………………………………………………….
5. How old is Lan?
………………………………………………………………………………...............................
V.Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn (2.5 điểm)
1.What / your / name ?( Hoàn chỉnh câu)
.......................................................................................................................................................
?
2.How / people /be / there/ your / family?( ( Hoàn chỉnh câu)
.....................................................................................................................................................?
3.What are this? (Tìm lỗi sai và
sửa ) .............................................................................................................................................
........?
4. .................. do you live ?(Tìm từ)
.....................................................................................................................................................?
5. ................................................................................................................................................?
I’m twelve years old (Đă ̣t câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

THE END

ĐỀ II
I.Khoanh tròn chữ cái trước từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn lại.(1,0
điểm)
1. A. classroom B. door C. school D. afternoon
2 A. that B. stand up C. thanks D. table
3.A. children B. fine C.night D. hi
4. A. desk B. television C. eraser D. pen
II.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0 điểm)
1. What’s her name? - …………… name’s Hoa
a. My b. his c. her D.their
2. How are you? – I’m ……… thanks.
a. eleven b. fine C five D. good
3. …….. do you live? – I live in Hue.
a. Where b. How c. Who D. What
4. What ……… these? They are pens.
a. is b. am c. are d.
5. …….. are you? – I’m eleven.
a. What b. How manyc. How D. How old
6. …………. does she do? – She’s a student.
a. What b. How c. Who D. Where
7.How do…… spell your name?
A. she B. your C. they D. he
8. ………. people are there in my family?
a. How many b. How c. How old D. How much
III.Chia đô ̣ng từ tobe (am/is/are) chothích hợp (2,0 điểm)
1.How old (be) …………………… she?
2.What (be) ……………. those?
3.She (be ) ……………….. a student.
4.I (be) ……………………. eleven year old.
IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (2,5 điểm)
There are four people in Lan’s family. Her father is thirty eight years old. He’s a

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

teacher . Her mother is thirty five years old. She’s a nurse . Her sister is twelve years old.
She is a student. Lan is ten years old.
1.Are there five people in Lan’s family?
……………………………………………………………………………….............................
2. How old is her father ?
…………………………………………………..........................................................................
3. What does her mother do?
………………………………………………………………………………….........................
4. What does her sister do ?
…………………………………………………………………………………...........................
5. Is Lan ten years old?
…………………………………………………………………..............................................?
V.Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn (2.5 điểm)
1.What / his /name? ( Hoàn chỉnh
câu) ...............................................................................................................................................
.....?
2.How / many /books /be/there /on/ table? ( Hoàn chỉnh câu)
...................................................................................................................................................?
3What ………….. these? (Tìm từ)
.....................................................................................................................................................?
4.How do you live ?” (Tìm lỗi sai và
sửa ) ..............................................................................................................................................
.......?
5.How old are you? (Trả lời về bản thân)
....................................................................................................................................................?
Answer key
Đề I Đề II

1 B B
2 D D
3 C D
4 A C
1 A C
2 A B
3 C A
4 A C
5 B D
6 C A
7 D B

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

8 C A
1 are is
2 is are
3 am is
4 is am
1 There are four people in Lan’s family No, there aren’t
2 Her father is thirty eight years old Her father is thirty eight years old
3 No, she isn’t She is a nurse
4 She is a student She is a student
5 Lan is ten years old Yes, she is
1 What is your name? What is his name?
2 How many people are there in your How many book are there on the table
family?
3 are=> is are
4 Where How ->Where
5 How old are you? I’m …..years old
---------------------------------  ---------------------
Period: 20 TEST CORRECTION
A . Teaching aims
By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to know what they did in the test.Therefore they
get more experience to study better.
B.Teaching aids: board,cards,…..
D.Procedures:
T calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes, from big to small mistakes
- T asks Ss what they did in the test.What they did well and what they didn’t do well.What
they did but they didn’t know they are true or false.
- Calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes ,from big to small mistakes.
Question I:
- All of Ss know how to pronounce so they choose right,However some student’s choose not
right.
Eg:
Question II:
- There are many Ss choose exactly.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Eg: - Besides, there are some week Ss didn’t know how to choose right answers ,choose
many answer in the sentence.
Question III:
All of Ss know how to answer present simple of tobe, so they did very well.
Question IV:
There are some Ss know how to answer question paragraph,so they write very well.
Eg:
- Although,there are some Ss didn’t know how to rewrite these sentences so they didn’t write
true.
Eg:
Question V:
-All of Ss write the sentence very well
E- Consolidation:
F- Homework: - Prepare Unit4:Lesson 1
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / /2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL
Period 21. Lesson 1: Where is your school?(A 1- 2)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to practice reading comprehension
a description of a school , using possessive of nouns .
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: big> < small, in the country, in the city
2. Grammar: How many.............?- There is/ There are..........
- New structure: tobe + adjectives, tobe + adverb phrases
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: Ask Ss to go to the board and write the answer to the question
6 ……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
1

3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

students’ activities +contents
(blackboard)
Presentation -New words
T: Plays the tape and ask Ss to listen one - small >< big : nhỏ- lớn
time - country ( n ): miền quê
Ss : listen and find out new words. - in the country: ở miền quê
T: gives new words. - in the city: ở thành phố
Ss: guess meaning and take note.
Ss: listen and repeat. Then practice.
T: controls and corrects.
* Check vocab: R.O.R
T: Let ss guess about Phong`s and Thu`s II- Listen and repeat
school. 1. Open prediction
Ss: guess. Phong`s school:small, in the country
T: Let ss listen to the tape. Thu`s school:big, in the city.
Practice 2. Grammar:
-T: Ask Sts to read the text and check with * Question with “tobe”
their prediction. ( Correct the false Tobe + S + adj? Yes, it is/ No, it isn`t.
information.)individually then pair compare. ex1: Is Phong’s school small?
Ss: Practise the text . Yes, it is.
- Get feed back from Sts. * Possessive case: Noun`s noun
+/ Modle sentences: Elicit from Sts. ex : Nam’s desk, My father’s house.
? Is Phong’s school small? * Position of adjective : after “tobe “and
- Yes, it is. before nouns
* Possessive case: Noun`s noun
ex : Nam’s desk. ex : Thu`s school is big
My father’s house. - It is a / an + adj + noun
* Position of adjective ex : It is a small school.
- S + be + adj 3. Answer(A2)
- It is a / an + adj + noun a. Yes, it is.
*Comprehension questions: A 2 (P.44) b. No, it isn’t.
- Get Sts to read the text again and then c. It is in the country.
practice asking and answering the d. No, it isn’t. It is in the city.
questions in pairs.
Ss: Pairwork.

Production.
- T: Get Sts to read the text (P.45) and answer

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

the questions III- Read. Then answer the questions
Ss: Practice.
- Get feed back from Sts. * Answer the questions
+ Answer keys: a.There are eight classrooms in Phong’s
_ Thu’s school: 8, 400 school.
- Phong’ school: 20, 900. b. There are four hundred students in his
IV/ Consolidation:(1- 4' ) school.
-T: Ask ss to retell the lesson. c.There are twenty classrooms in Thu’s
school.
d. There are nine hundred students in her
V/ Homework:(2') school.
- Write a short passage about their school. * Word cues: ( for fair students) Have ss
- Do exercises - part A in the workbook. ask and answer with the words given
- Prepare the new lesson : B A3, 4. - Thu’s school/ big/ Yes.
- Hoa`s house/ small/ No.
- Your brother’s school/ small/ No.
- His school/ in the country/ Yes.

E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 7. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : / /2013 WEEK 8 Date of teaching : / / 2013


UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL
Period 22. Lesson 2: Where is your school?(A 3- 4)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to improve listening skill by
listening to a dialogue about school and "How many, which" questions to talk abschool and
class.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: to have, grade, class, floor
2. Grammar: Which grade/ class...........? How many...do/does......have?
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: T: ask Ss some questions
1 . Where is your school ? 2 . Is your school small ?
3. How many classrooms are there in your school?
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
Pre- listening -I/ Vocabulary:
T: sets the situation and plays the tape one - Which: cái nào
time. - grade ( n ): khối học
Ss: listen and find out new words. ex: Which grade/ class are you in?
T: gives new words. I’m in grade 6/ class 6A
Ss: guess the meaning and take note. - Floor ( n ) tầng
Ss: listen and repeat. Then practice. - have / has ( v ): có
T: introduces the new questions - what about you? = and you?
T: plays the tape - How many…. do/does…. have?=
Ss: listen and repeat the dialogue.
+ Predict Dialogue.
T: - We are going to listen to a
conversation between Thu and Phong
Before listening you predict which words will

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

fill in the gaps How many ….. are there ?
Check: ? What do you have to do now? - first : 1st
Ss: Predict and fill in the gaps. (poster) - second: 2nd
- Ss predict and give their ideas. II/ Listening:
- T gets Ss’ predictions and writes on the 1. Gap- fill:
board. Thu: Hello, Which grade are you in?
While- listening Phong : I'm in grade (1)…6..
- T reads the dialogue or play the tape. Thu: And which class are you in?
-Ss listen to the dialogue carefully, then Phong: (2)…6Awhat about you?
check their predictions. Thu: I'm in grade (3) 7.., class (4)…7C.How
-T calls on Ss to give their answers after many floors does your school have?
listening. Phong: (5)….Two.It is a small school.
- Give feedback and correct. Thu: My school has (6)…..four…..
- T give s examples and structures. floors and my classroom is on the
-Để hỏi Phong học khối mấy, Thu hỏi: (7).second…floor. Where’syour
“Which grade are you in?” classroom ?
- Để hỏi Phong học lớp nào, Thu “Which Phong: It's on the (8)..first.floor.
class are you in?” 2. Structures:
Để hỏi có bao nhiêu tầng trong trường của a)Hỏi học khối, lớp, tầng mấy.
Phong, Thu hỏi: “How many floors does it Which grade/ Class/ floor + tobe + s+in ?
have?” S + tobe + in ………
Post- listening b) Hỏi số lượng.
T: Have ss ask and answer about their grade, How many + Ns + do/does + S + have?
class and floor. - S + have/has……
Ss: Pairwork.
T: explains the way to answer with “or”. III/ Practice (A4):
Then guides the way to do task. ex: Are you a student or a teacher?
Ss: work in pairs. I’m a student
1S writes on the board. a. Is your school in the country or in the
Ss: comment city?
T: corrects their mistakes My school is in the country.
Ss: take note. b. There are twelve classrooms.
IV/ Consolidation:(1- 5' ) c. There are thirty- one students in my
T: review the mains points
Sts: listen and remember
V/ Homework:(2')
- Read the A5- p46 in the books, learn new
words and structures.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Write 5 sentences about you. school.
- Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook ( P38)
- Prepare Unit 4: B1-5. * Word cues: ( for fair students) Have ss
ask and answer with the words given.
- Hoa/ grade 8/ class 8A.
- Hoa’s school/ classrooms/ 15.
- Mai/ grade 7/ class 7B.

E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / /2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL
Period 23. Lesson 3: My class?(B1- 5)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: Help the students to talk about their grades, class, the number of the
classroom, the floor of the school
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: + ordinal numbers: first, second, third,.............
2. Grammar: Review: Which/ where...........? How many....does......have?
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: T: Ask somequestions:
+ Is your school big or small? + How many classooms are there?
+ How many students are there?
61……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
3. New lesson:
Teachers’ activities

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

students’ activities +contents
(blackboard)
Presentation I/ New words:
* Pre- teach newwords first = 1st sixth = 6th
T: introduces the ordinal numbers. Then plays second = 2nd seventh = 7th
the tape. third = 3rd eight = 8th
Ss: listen and repeat. Then practice. fouth = 4th ninth = 9th
T: controls and corrects. fifth = 5th tenth = 10th
T ask ss some structures they have learned. II/ Revision
*/ Review structure */ Ask about grade/ class :
How do you ask about grade ? Which grade / class are you in ?
How do you ask about class ? I’m in grade/ class ………
How do you ask about the number of the */ Ask about floor :
floors ? How many floors does your school have ?
T: Give the table( B2/ 48). Ask ss to guess It has two floors .
Sts: guess III/ Practice:
Practice 1/ Complete the table(B2)
* Complete the table Classroom’s
T: Have ss read the dialogue and check. Name Grade Class floor
Sts: open the book practice and check. Thu 7 7C 2nd
T: Call some pairs to read the dialogue . Phong 6 6A 1st
Sts: read the dialogue again. Then complete You 6 6C 1st
the flashcard.
Sts: comment. 2/ Complete the dialogue(B5)
T: give the correct answer. Thu : Is your school big ?
* Complete the dialogue ( T use projector) Phong : No. It’s small.
T: hang the poster on the board and ask Ss to Thu : How many floors does it have?
complete the dialogue. Phong : It has two floors.
Sts: discuss in groups. Thu : Which class are you in ?
Sts: read the dialogue in pairs. Phong : I’m in class 6A.
Sts: comment Thu : Where is your classroom ?
T: correct their mistakes. Phong : It’s on the first floor.
Ss: take note.
Production
* Hold a game : Lucky number ( T uses
projector)
1. Lucky number
2. Correct mistake in this sentence

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

My school have two floors 3/ Lucky number
th
3. Write 9
4. His classroom on the second floor
5. Lucky number 1 2 3
6. Put in the correct order
his / big / school / Is ? 4 5 6
7.Write complete sentence
Nam / house / big 7 8 9
8. Write complete sentence
Hoa / books / small
9. Lucky number
- T praise the winner Team1 Team2
IV/ Consolidation:(1- 5' ) ………..
-T: Ask ss to retell the " Which/ where, How
many” questions.
Ss: Answer Have ss rewrite the paragraph with the
subject “ She” ( For fair students.)
V/ Homework:(3') My name is Lan. I live in Luc Ngan. I am a
- Learn by heart the new words. Write a short student. I am in grade 6. I am in class 6A.
paragraph about yourselves. My school has two floors. My classroom is
Ex: My name is….I am a student. I am in on the first floor.
grade… Ex: Her name is Lan. She lives in…
- Do exercises - part B ( P.38- 40)
- Prepare the new lesson: C1,2,3

E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / /2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL
Period 24. Lesson 4: Getting ready for school ( C1-3)
A.Teaching aims:
1. Knowledges: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about their
routine, time and know about Simple Present Tense and vocabulary of routines to talk about
habitual actions.
2. Skills: Practice 4 skills.
3. Attitude Work hard.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: get up, get dressed, brush, teeth, wash, face, have/has, breakfast...
2. Grammar: What do you do every morning ? I get up.
What does Ba do every morning ? He gets up
C. Teaching aids: book, pictures.
D. Procedure
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson:
6 ……………………………………….62:………………………………………..
1

3. New lesson:
students’ activities +contents
Teachers’ activities
(blackboard)
 Presentation I- New words
* present vocabulary - (to) get up : thức dậy
T: sets the situation and plays the tape one - (to) get dressed : mặc quần áo
time. - (to) brush teeth : đánh răng
Ss: listen and find out new words. - (to) wash face : rửa mặt
T: gives new words. -(to) go to school : đi học
Ss: guess meaning and take note. - (to) have breakfast : ăn sáng
Ss: listen and repeat. Then practice. - every (det): mỗi, một
=> Checking: matching II- Grammar:
* present grammar Thì hiện tại đơn(The present simple tense)
T: plays the tape. Ex1: I get dressed.
Ss: listen and repeat. Then practice. Ba gets dressed.
Ss: practice reading Ex2: I have breakfast.
T: cotrols and corrects mistakes. He has breakfast.
T: Ask ss: What do you do in the morning? => Form: S + V/ V(s,es)........
Ss: Answer. - I/ We/ You/ They/ Nga and Lan + V
T: write example on the board. Let ss practice - He/ She/ It/ Ba + V( s/es )
example. * Use : Dùng để diễn tả hành động, thói
Ss: Pracise in pairs. quen xảy ra thường xuyên ở hiện tại .
T : explains the way to use the present simple *Note: Những động từ tận cùng bằng
tense o,sh,ch khi đối với chủ ngữ ngôi thứ 3 số ít
Ss : listen and take note

 Practice
* Do the task.
T: Let ss do the task.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Ss: Do as teacher ask. thì phải thêm “es”
* Practice asking and answering. Khi chủ nghĩa ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít thì “have”
T: gives model first. Then guides the way to chuyển thành “has”
practice. III- Practice:
What do you do in the morning? 1. Write the correct form
I get up. - Nga ( go ) …….. to school.
I brush my teeth. - She ( brush ) ……… her teeth.
I have breakfast. - I ( have ) ……… breakfast.
What does Ba do every morning? 2. Practice with a partner
He brushes my teeth. What do you do every morning?
T: asks Ss to read part1 again. Then write five Ex1 : What do you do every morning ?
sentences about Ba. I get up. Then I wash my face …
Ss: read the model first. Then do the task. What does Ba do every morning?
T: controls and corrects mistakes. Ex2: What does Ba do every morning?
 Production He brushes my teeth.
T: asks Ss to read part1 again. Then write five 3. Write
sentences about Ba. ex: Every morning, Ba gets up. He gets
Ss: read the model first. Then do the task. dressed. ……………..
T: controls and corrects mistakes.
Have ss rewrite the paragraph with the
subject “ She” ( For fair students.)
My name is Lan. I live in Thanh Thach. I
IV/ Consolidation:(2-7' ) am a student. I am in grade 6. I am in class
. 6A. My school has two floors. My
T: controls and corrects. classroom is on the first floor.
Ex: Her name is Lan. She lives in…
-T: Ask ss to retell the the lesson.
Ss: Answer
V/ Homework:(2-3') * Missing words ( for fair students)
- Learn by heart the new words and structure. 1.Hoa…brushes…. her teeth every day.
- Do exercise 1,2 ( P50) 2. He……goes….. to school every morning.
- Prepare the new lesson: Unit 4: C4-7. 3.Minh and Mai …get.. up at six every
morning.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

4. She …has… breakfast with her family
every morning.
5. I ……wash…… my face every day.
Ss: listen and do task
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 8. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : / / 2013 WEEK11 Date of teaching : / / 2013


UNIT 5: THINGS I DO
Period 31. Lesson6 :Classes (C2-C3)
A.Teaching aims: Help the students to talk about the timetable and students may use the time
table to talk with their partners.
B. Language contents
1. Vocabulary: Monday,Tuesday,Wednesday,Thursday,Friday,Sunday,Saturday
2. Grammar: Simple present tense : Verb HAVE
C. Teaching aids:Pictures page 58 and cassete

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

D. Procedure
1. Warm up:
2. Old lesson: S1: What time is it? S2: It is seven o’clock
S1: What time do you go to school? S2: I go to school at ……..
6 ……………………………………………… 62:……………………………………………..
1

3. New lesson
Teacher and students’ activities Contents
1.Presentation+ Pre teach: Vocab I.Presentation1.Vocabulary
Using techniques for eliciting new vocab Monday: Thø hai
Ss read the Vocab. Chorally then Tuesday: Thø ba
individually Wednesday: Thø t
+ Checking Vocab: Do matching Thursday: Thø n¨m
+Set the scene: Friday: Thø s¸u
(Who is this?(?) (Ba) Saturday: Thø b¶y
(?) Is this Nga?(Yes) Sunday: Chñ nhËt
(?) What are they talking about? 2. Dialogue
(timetable) Nga: When do we have (1)................?
- T.: Before reading the dialogue, you have Ba: We have it on (2)....................
to predict and fill in each gaps with suitable and ( 3 )……………………
words à check Nga: When do we have (4) math.......?
(?) What do you have to do now? Ba: We have it on (5).................(6)..........
Ss: predict and fill in the gaps ....................(7)
- Divide the class in to 2 groups A-B Nga: Does Lan have Math on(8)............
- Deliver the hand outs to 2 groups . Ask Ss Ba: No, She doesn’t
to discuss and fill in the gaps  Answer key
- Get 2 groups hand out and stick on the 1. History 5. Monday
board 2. Tuesday 6. Wednesday
* Reading and checking 3.Thursday 7. Friday
-Ask Ss to read the dialogue(A3/P.59) then 4. Math 8. Friday
check their predictions . Model sentences
- Give feed back and correct When do we have History?
- Have 2 pairs read again We have it on Tuesday and Thursday
- Elicit from the students to give the model + Use: Hái vµ tr¶ lêi xem khi nµo cã c¸c
sentences m«n häc
- Read the model sentences (chorus/pairs) + Note: at: giê on: c¸c ngµy trong tuần
+ Concept check(meaning/form/ use/pro) II.PracticeTimetable
2.Practice: Board Dill Monday Tuesday Wednesday
Run through all words in the timetable Chemistry Literature Fine arts

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

_ Ask Ss to ask and answer when they have English Physics Literature
the subject in the timetable , using the Fine arts Music Biology
model sentences above Math Physical- English
T. and a good student model first education

Thursday Friday
Biology History
Math Geography
Math Math
math
- Ss write individually III. Production:
- Have Ss go to the board to write( 2Ss) Examples
T.WC correct We have English on Monday, Wednesday
and Saturday
We have Math on Monday, Thursday and
Friday
We have Literature on Tuesday, Wednesday
and Literature
III. Further practice:
Mapped dialogue:
- What ... today ? history
-What time ....... start ? ...............
- Do we ................. ?Yes/ No
Write the dialogue
III. Home work
III. Home work 1. Learn by hear the Vocab
1. Learn by hear the Vocab 2. Complete the dialogue above
2. Complete the dialogue above 3. Do C in exercise book
3. Do C in exercise book 4.Prepare: Grammar Practice
4.Prepare: Grammar Practice
T. guides Ss to do the homework
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
UNIT 5: THINGS I DO
Period 32. Lesson7: GRAMMAR PRACTICE

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

A.Teaching aims:
Help the students to review vocabulary and grammar from unit 4 to unit 5.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: vocabulary and some basic sentences
2. Grammar: Simple present tense
Ask and answer about the time. WH-question , question word.
C. Teaching aids: - Lesson plan, text book, Picture, poster of gap fill.
D. Procedure
1.Warm up
2. Old lesson: Write the new words
61………………………………………………62:…………………………………………….
3. New lesson
Teacher and students’ activities Contents
1. Activity1 I. Telling the time
- Ask Ss to repeat the way to tell the time - What time is it?
Ss repeat- T. writes on board What is the time?
Have Ss give examples  Answer
Ask Ss to practise asking and answering +Giê ®óng: It is + giê+ o’clock
about the time in exercise 2/P.60 (in pairs) + Giê h¬n: It is + giê+ phót
Call on some pairs of students to practice + Giê kÐm: It is + phót + to + giê
before the class Example
Give feedback and correct (?) What time is it? It is eight o’clock
six ten
half fast six
a quarter to seven
* Practice: Ex2/p.60 Example exchange
S1: What time is it?
S2: It is seven o’clock
2. Activity 2: Question words II. Question words:
- Ask Ss to retell some question - How, what, where, when, who, which
words they have learnt and uses of *Practice: Ex4/p.61
them Key
- Ss answer a. Where d. How
- have Ss do the exercise 4/P.61 b. How e. which
Ss complete the (question word) questions c. What f. which
using the question words:
- Give feedback and correct *.Noughts and crosses
 Noughts and crosses Tran Phu 8.00 Play

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Divide the class in to 2 team A-B street(1) (2) soccer(3)
- Ask Ss to make questions using the Literature 3 floors Grade 6
question words and answer using (4) (5) (6)
the information in the boxes Tuesday & 7.30 Class 6C
- The team who gets 3 noughts or 3 Friday (8) (9)
crosses in a line will win the game (7)
- Praise the winner Example Exchange
S1: How many floors does your school have?
S2: It has 3 floors
III. Adjectivee with “be”

3.Acitivity 3: Adjective with “be” (+) S + Tobe+adj (?) Tobe + S + adj?


- Ask Ss to repeat the function and Yes, S + to be No, S + to be not
the position of adjective Eg. Is your hour big? à yes, it is
- Have Ss give examples? -> No, it isn’t
* Practices: word cues: Exampe Exchange
- Run through all word cues S1: Is your house big?
- T. models first Ss repeat S2: yes, it is/ No, it is not
- Ss work in pairs to practice IV: The present simple tense
Open pairs – closed pairs 1. Form(+) S+ V(s/es)
.Activity 4: The present simple tense (-) S + doesn’t /don’t + V(bare- inf)
-Ask Ss to repeat the form and the use of (?) Do/Does + S + V(bare- int)
this tens Yes, S + do/does
No, S + don’t/does
-Get Ss to retell the ways to ad “s/es” 2. Use
1 hµnh ®éng thêng xuyªn x¶y ra ë hiÖn t¹i
- 1 sù thËt, 1 ch©n lý lu«n lu«n ®óng
3. Adverbs:
Always, usually, often, sometime...
4. How to add “s/es”
*Practice: Ex1/p.60
a. get-gets b. do… have
get- get have
*.Practice: get- get does…. have
- Ask Ss to do the exercise1/p.60 has do……. have
- Ss work in pairs to do c. do ...........go d. Do..........wash
- Call on students to give their ideas go wash
Give feedback and correct - do................go does ……wash

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- go - washes
- does ............go
- goes
VI. Homework V. Days in a week
- Revise all Grammar Notes -
- Do all exercises (p.60-61) again
Prepare: Unit 6 : lesson 1- A1-2
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Unit6: places
Period 33. Lesson1: OUR HOUSE (A1-A2)
A.Teaching aims: By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to read a text about where
Thuy lives to understand the details and practice country vocabulary.
B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: tree, lake, river, park, flower, rice paddy
2. Grammar: Simple present tense :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 62, 63 and cassette.
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up Greeting
2. Check up
3. New lesson
Teacher and students’activities Contents
+ Pre teach: Vocabulary I. Presentation1. Vocabulary
- T uses pictures for eliciting the new word a lake (n): hå
- T/ Ss read the Vocab. a river (n): s«ng
- Ss read the Vocab chorally/ individually. trees(n): c©y cèi
- Checking the Vocab: R.O.R flowers (n): hoa
+ Open prediction. a rice paddy(n): c¸nh ®ång lóa
- T sets the scene: a park (n): c«ng viªn
2. While Reading 2. The text.
T asks Ss to read the text silently then 1. Answer the question
answer their predictions. ( ? ) What’s near Thuy’s house?
Ask Ss to give their ideas after reading the  a lake, a river, a park, a rice paddy, a
text. hotel.
-Give feedback and correction. 2. Matching.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

b) Matching near xinh ®Ñp
- T asks Ss to read the text again, guess the a yard kh¸ch s¹n
meaning of these words from context beautiful gÇn
and match. hotel c¸i s©n
+ Comprehension Questions 3. Answer the questions.
T divides the class in to 2 groups: A –B ( Poster : Questions from a-> f.)
T’s instructions -> check. Lucky numbers.
Ss play in groups: 1 2 3
No1: Q-a, No2: Qd, No3: Qb, No4: LK, 4 5 6
No5: LK, No6:Qe, No7: Qf, No8: Qe, No9: 7 8 9
LK A B
After finish the game: T praise the winner. II. Practice.
- Answer key Example exchange:
a. Thuy is twelve S1: What is this/ that?
b. She is a student S2: It’s a river
c. His name is Minh S2: What are these/those?
d. He is twenty S2: They’re trees
e. She lives in s house
f. There's a lake, a river and a rice paddy
+ Picture drill / P62 - 63 III. Write it up. (A3/p. 63)
- Ask Ss to ask and answer the * Answer key
questions about the things in the Our house has a yard. It’s near a rice paddy.
pictures/p.62 - There is a hotel near the lake.
- T models with a good student. - There is a river near the park.
Ss work in pairs(open pairs/ closed pairs) - There are trees and flowers in the park.
+ Writing: * For normal students:
Have Ss complete the sentences using the
cues and pictures.
Ss write in 2 groups: A- B
T delivers hand out to Ss.
T gets Ss’ hand out -> stick on the board to
check.
TWC praise the winner.
* For good students:
- Have Ss stand before class and
describe the things near their house.
- T. check and correct.
T guides Ss to do the homework

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

VI. Homework
A3 / P63 and A1 / P63 (Questions)
Answer the question: What’s near your
house?
Do Ex1,2,3 /p.60- 61(work book)
- Be ready for Unit 6- Lesson 2: A4-5
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................

Duyệt tuần 11. Ngày …/ ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : / / 2013 WEEK 12 Date of teaching : / / 2013


Unit6 places

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Period 34. Lesson2 :Our house (A3-5)
A.Teaching aims By the end of the lesson, the Ss may listen and know the places around their
houses, describe the places near their houses.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: review: town, city, village...
2. Grammar: Simple present tense : There is ... / there are ...
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 64 and cassette .
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: read & write vocabulary
61………………………………………………62:…………………………………………….
3. New lesson
Teacher and students’activities Contents
1. Presentation: Pre teach: Vocab. I .Presentation:1. Vocabulary.
- T uses some techniques for eliciting the a town (n): thÞ trÊn
new Vocab. a village(n) lµng xã
- T/ Ss read the Vocab. a city(n) thµnh phè
- Ss read the vocab. Chorally/ individually. a country(n) n«ng th«n
- Checking the Vocab: What and Where. a country
a city

a village
a town

+ Listening: 2. Listen. Write the words you hear in


-Ask Ss to read the words listed in the grid. your notebook.
- T plays the tape ans asks Ss to listen and Answer key:
tick the words they’ve listed. a. hotel
-> Check: b. country
? What do you have to do now? c. rice paddy, river
( Listen to the tape and tick the words we’ve
heard.)
- T plays the tape twice.
- Ss listen carefully.
- Give feedback and correct.
2. Practice. Picture drill( a-> f/p.64). II. Practice: A5/ P.64.
- Have Ss work in pairs to talk about the Example exchange.
place they live basing on the pictures/ P. 64. S1: There is a hotel near our house.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- T asks Ss to run through all pictures
- T models first. S2: There are trees near our house.
- Ss work in pairs: open pairs/ closed pairs.
3. Further practice. III.Further practice.
* For normal students. *. Write: Write sentences about your
- Ask Ss to write some sentences about places.
things where they live. Group A ----------- Group B
- T WC check and correct.
* For good students: Chain game: *. Chain game: ( Speaking)
- T calls on 6 Ss to go to the board .They S1: There is a hotel near our house.
take turn to describe place where they live. S2: There is a hotel , and a school near my
- Ask Ss to write about their places. house.
- Ss write in groups: A- B S3: There is a hotel, a school and a lake near
- Give feedback and correction. our house.
IV. Homework. S4: ……………..
Write sentences about your places.
Do Ex1/ P. 32-33 ( exercise note book ).
Be ready for B1- 3.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Unit6: places
Period 35. Lesson3: In the city (B1-B3).
A.Teaching aids:
- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to read a text about where Minh lives to
understand town vocabulary and prepositions of place.
B .Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: store, bookstore, temple, factory, hospital, museum, stadium, restaurant.
2. Grammar: Simple present tense
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 65,66 and cassette
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: Where do you live? What is near your house?
61………………………………………………62:…………………………………………….
3. New lesson :
Teacher and students’ activities Contents

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1. Presentation:+ Pre teach: Vocab I. Vocabulary.
T : elicits the vocab from the students(using a (book) store(n): hiÖu s¸ch
pictures, explanation) a temple (n): ®×nh , miÕu.
Ss:repeat in chorus.repeat individually. a restaurant(n): nhµ hµng
+ Check: Matching: a hospital(n) : bÖnh viÖn
Have ss go to the board to match one English a factory(n): nhµ m¸y
word with one suitable meaning. a museum(n): b¶o tµng
a stadium (n): s©n vËn ®éng
neighborhood(n): hµng xãm, khu l©n cËn.
+ T sets the sence: II. The text.
“ You are going to read a text about Minh. He 1. True or false statements?
tells us about his family and things rear his a. Minh lives in the country.
house. Before reading I have some statements b. There are four people in his family.
(some of them are T and some of them are F). c. Their house is next to a bookstore.
You should read and tell me which sentence d. There is a museum near the house.
is true and which one is false.). e. Minh’s father works in a hospital.
+ Check: How many sentences are there? (6) f. Minh’s mother works in a factory.
? What do you have to do now? => Answer key:
( Predict True or False). a b c d e f
- Ss give their ideas, T gets Ss’ ideas. F T T T F F
2. While reading. 2. Correct the false statements.
- Have Ss read the text about Minh on P. 65- a. in the city.
66, then check their prediction. e. in a factory.
- Ss read the text in three minus ( can share f. in a hospital.
woth their partners).
- Have Ss correct the false statements.
+ Do matching
Ask Ss to go to the board to do the matching
( one by one).
T read the words again.
Ss read in chorus/ individual. 3. Fill in the gaps with suitable words.
+ Gap – fill. B2/p.66.
Ask Ss to read B1 again.Then complete the Answer key:a. city
sentences. b. restaurant….. bookstore…. temple
- Ss work in groups to do. ( A- B). c. hospital.
+ Check: d. house…… store.
? How many sentences are there?( 5) e. factory.
? How many gaps are there? ( 8)…….

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Ss do in 5 minutes.
- T gets 2 groups’ ideas and check.
3. Post- reading: III Post- reading:
- Ask Ss to speak about things near their *speak about things near your house.
house. * Fill in the gaps with suitable words.B3
- Have Ss stand before class to describe. I live in a (1)……………on a (2)
- T: check/ correct. ……………….., in a ( 3)……………
T plays the tape, asks Ss to listen carefully near a ( 4)…………….where friends meet
then check their predictions. to eat.
Give feedback and correction. Answer key.1. house 3. city
T elicits the model sentences from the 2. street 4. restaurant.
students. III. Homework.
Have Ss read the model in chorus/ pairs. Learn by heart the Vocab
Concept check: Do B1-2 / P. 62- 63 ( work book)
+ Meaning, Form, Use, Pro. Write 6 sentences describing your house.
Be ready for B3-4.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Unit6: places
Period 36. Lesson4 : Around the house (C1-C2)
A.Teaching aids:
- By the end of the lesson, the Ss practice more prepositions of place: in front of, behind, to
the left/ right of, to describe the position of a house.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: in front of, behind, to the right ,to the left ...
2.Grammar: Simple present tense: There is ...../ there are .........
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 68, 69 and cassette
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up
2. Old lesson: Write the words that T read & the meaning. Discribe you house
61………………………………………………62:…………………………………………….
3. New lesson
Teacher and students’activities Contents
1. Presentation.Pre- teach: Vocabulary I.Presentation.1. Vocabulary.
+ Using some techniques for eliciting new in front of(prep): ë phÝa tríc

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Vocab.( pictures/ realias) behind (prep) : ë ®»ng sau.
- T / Ss read the Vocab. to the right of(prep): ë bªn ph¶i
- Ss read the Vocab chorally then to the left of(prep): ë bªn tr¸i
individually. opposite(prep): ®èi diÖn
- Checking the Vocab. Do matching. a well(prep): c¸i giÕng
+ Presentation text. a mountain(prep): ngän nói
- T sets the scene: Look at the pictures and 2. Read the text
answer my questions.
? What is this ? ( a house ).
There are many things around the house.
Listen to the text to understand the
description of the house.
- T palys the tape – Ss listen.
2. Practice. II.Practice.
Have Ss ask and answer the questions ( a- *.Ask and answer the questions. (p. 68)
> f /p. 68). a. Where is the yard?
T and a student models first. b. Where are the tall trees/
Give Ss 3 minutes to prepare. c. Where are the mountains?
Ss work in pairs d. Where is the well?
e. Where are the flowers?
f. Where is the house?
Ex exchange: S1: Where are the tall trees?
S2: They are behind the house.
3. Further practice. III. Further practice:
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and 1. Listen: C2/ P. 69: Matching.
a. Which is Ba’s house? A
think of the positions of things around the
house. b. Which is Lan’s house? A
- Have Ss listen to the tape and find which c. Which is Tuan’s house? B
houses are described.
- Ss look at the pictures and listen to the
tape at the same time.
- Call on Ss to give their ideas after
listening
- T correct.
* Writing. 2.Writing. Write about Ba,Tuan and Lan’s
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures again and houses.
write sentences describing those houses. + Red team:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Divide the class in to 2 teams: Red- Blue. There are a lot of flowers in front of Ba’s
- Give Ss 2 minutes to do. house………
- Get Ss’ writing-> TWC correct. + Bue team:
( T guides Ss to do the homework) - Ther are tall trees to the right of the
house………..
V. Homework.
- Learn by heart the Vocab.
- Answer the questions C1/p.68 again.
- Do exercise 3/p.34 ( exercise notebook)
E.Give experience
.....................................................................................................................................................
………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Duyê ̣t tuần 12. Ngày …/ …/ 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : / / 2013


WEEK 13 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Unit6: places
Period 37. Lesson5: Around the house (C3-4)
A.Teacing aids:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to practice “Where is …/ are…?” questions
and answers with town vocabulary and prepositions of place to describe a street.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: between, drugstore, photocopy store, bakery, restaurant, police station.
2 Grammar: Simple present tense: Where is ....? Where are ......?
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 68, 69 and cassette
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up:- Greeting
2. Old lesson: Write vocabulary & look at the picture in part 2 ,discribe the house
61……………………………………………… 62:……………………………………………..
3. New lesson
Teacher and students’ activities Contents
1. Presentationa. Pre teach- Vocabulary I. . Presentation
T: elicits the voc. (using picture C3/P.70) 1.Vocabulary.
the drugstore(n): hiê ̣u thuốc
( picture) the toystore(n): cöa hµng ®å ch¬i
(nt) the movie theater : r¹p chiÕu phim
(nt) the police station(n): ®ån c¶nh s¸t
(nt) the bakery (n):tiÖm b¸nh m×
(realia) photocopy store (n) : qu¸n ph«t«
Ss: repeat the whole class and individually. between (pre) : ë gi÷a
+ Checkimg the Vocabulary: Matching
b. Presentation text: C3/P.70 2. Listen and read
T: reads C3.
ss: repeat the text the whole class and
individually
+ Checking the Vocabulary: Matching.
+ Presentation text.C3/p.70. 3.Model sentences.
- T sets the sence: S1:Where is the photocopy store?
Look at the picture. There are many places S2: It’s next to the bakery.
on the street. To know more about =>Form: Where + be + S ?
them.Let’s listen to the tape”. S + be + preposition + place
- Ss can read and listen at the same time. => Use: To ask and answer about the
+ T elicits from the Ss to give the model prepositions of things
sentences.
- Ss read the model sentences in chorus, the
in pairs.
Concept checking:Meaning/ form/ uses/ pro.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2. Practice. II. Practice:
a.Picture drill: C4/D.70 a. Picture drill: C4/D.70
Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions Example exchange:
about the picures in exercise C3/ p..70. S1: Where is the toystore?
+ the movie theater. S2: It’s between the booksrore and the
+ the restaurant police station.
+ the police
+ the toystore
+ the children.
+ Run through all the pictures.
- T and Ss model first. Ss repeat.
Ss practice in pairs: Open pairs- Closed
pairs.
b. Guessing game: C4/P.71 b. Guessing game: C4/P.71
- Ask Ss to work in pairs: Example:
- No1: give suggestions. S1: It’s opposite the movie theater.What is
- No2 : predict what it is. it?
=> exchange. S2: It’s the police station.
+ Open pairs/ closed pairs. S1: That’s right
3. Production III. Production
T: reads, the bookstore, the mountains, the Write the dictation
restaurant, the hospital, the river, the
drugstore, the factory, trees, the police
station, the the bakery, the lake, the photopy
store, the museum, the park, the movie
theater, the stadium, the rice paddy, the
hotel, the village, the toystore.
-Ss write .
- T guides Ss to do the homework IV. Homework.
- Write down newwords.
- Learn by heart the structures and the uses
- Do C4 (b) /P.7
- Revise Unit 3- 6 for the written test.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Period 38. WRITTEN TEST No2
Time allowed: 45 minutes.
A.Teaching aids:Học sinh cần đạt được:
1. Từ vựng:Chọn từ có phát âm khác với từ còn lại
2. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ: Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu và chia dạng đúng của đô ̣ng
từ tong ngoă ̣c.
3. Đọc hiểu: Đọc đoạn văn về nơi sống của nhà Lan.
4. Viết: Viết câu theo chỉ dẫn.
B. Ma trâ ̣n
Nhận biếtt Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng
Chủ đề
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Phonetic
&Pronuciation 4 (1,0) 4 (1,0)
L.Focus 8 (2,0) 5 (2,5) 13 (4,5)
Reading 5 (2,5) 5 (2,5)
Writing 4 (2,0) 4 (2,0)
Tổng 13 (4,5) 9 (3,5) 4 (2,0) 26 (10)
II.Ways of working:
-Individual
III.Materals:
-Photo papers
IV.Procedure:+ Contents:
§Ò sè I:
I.Khoanh trßn ch÷ c¸i tríc tõ cã phÇn g¹ch ch©n ph¸t ©m kh¸cvíi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i.(1,0 ®iÓm)
1. A. five B. fifteen C. behind D. right
2. A. grade B. class C. late D. name
3. A. benches B. couches C. classes D. tables
4. A. country B. come C. cat D. city
II.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0 điểm)
1. We................... English on Monday, Tuesday and Friday.
A. have B. has C. to have D. haves
2. What time................. your father get up?
A. do B. does C. is D. are
3. The students..................... in the classroom.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

A. be B. am C. is D. are
4. Mai ..................... her teeth every morning.
A. don’t brush B. brush C. brushs D. brushes
5. Our children go to school ................. the morning.
A. in B. on C. at D. 0
6. The bookstore is....................... the restaurant.
A. next B. near C. the left of D. in front
7. His mother is a nurse and she ................. in a hospital.
A. work B. works C. don’t work D. working
8. ...................... does he work? He works in a hospital.
A. When B. What C. Where D. Who
III.Hoàn thành dạng đúng của từ trong ngoă ̣c(2,5 điểm)
1.I (get ) ……………. up at seven o’clock.
2.What time (do) ..……….. she go to school ?
3.There (be ) …………… a museum and hotel near their house .
4.Nam (listen )…………….. to music.
IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (2,0 điểm)
Her name is Lan. She lives in a house in the city. Near her house, there is a supermarket, a
bank, a post office . She is a student. She studies at Dong Le School. She goes to school at
six o’clock. There is a park in front of the school. There are many flowers in the park.
Behind the school, there is a small river.
1.Where does she live ?
………………………………………………………………………………………………..
2. What’s there,near her house ?
…………………………………………………......................................................................
3.Is she a teacher ?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. What time does she go to school ?
………………………………………………………………………………… ………….
5. Are there many flowers in the school?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
V.Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn
1. Miss Hoa lives in the city. (Đă ̣t câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân)
……………………………………………………………………………………………

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2. She / at / goes to school / o’clock. / six(Sắp xếp câu thành câu hoàn chỉnh)
...............................................................................................................................................
3.What time do you gets up ?
.............................................................................................................................................?
4. .................. many floors does it have ?(Tìm từ)
..............................................................................................................................................?
5. When do you have history?
.................................................................................................................................................
§Ò sè II:
I.Khoanh trßn ch÷ c¸i tríc tõ cã phÇn g¹ch ch©n ph¸t ©m kh¸cvíi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i.(1,0 ®iÓm)
1. A. evening B. engineer C. pencil D. stereo
2. A. watches B. fixes C. washes D. goes
3.A. who B. when C. what D. where
4. A. open B. soccer C. clock D. hospital
II.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0 điểm)
1. We................... English on Monday, Tuesday and Friday.
A. haves B. to have C. have D. has
2. What time................. you get up?
A. is B. are C. do D. does
3. Nam ..................... in the classroom.
A. be B. am C. is D. are
4. I ..................... my teeth every morning.
A. don’t brush B. brush C. brushs D. brushes
5. Our children go to school ................. the morning.
A. in B. on C. at D. 0
6. There is a temple next .................... my house.
A. to B. from C. near D. on
7. His parents is a nurse and They ................. in a hospital.
A. work B. works C. don’t work D. working
8. ...................... does he work? He works in a hospital.
A. When B. What C. Where D. Who
III.Hoàn thành dạng đúng của từ trong ngoă ̣c(2,0 điểm)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1.He (get ) ……………. up at six.
2.What time (do) ..……….. you go to school ?
3.There (be ) …………… a museum near their house .
4.I (listen )…………….. to music.
IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (2,0 điểm)
Her name is Lan. She lives in a house in the city. Near her house, there is a supermarket, a
bank, a post office . She is a student. She studies at Dong Le School. She goes to school at
six o’clock. There is a park in front of the school. There are many flowers in the park.
Behind the school, there is a small river.
1.Where does she live ?
………………………………………………………………………………………………..
2. What’s there,near her house ?
…………………………………………………......................................................................
3.Is she a teacher ?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. What time does she go to school ?
………………………………………………………………………………… ………….
5. Are there many flowers in the school?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
V.Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn (2,5 điểm )
1. Miss Hoa lives in the city. (Đă ̣t câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân)
……………………………………………………………………………………………
2. I / at / go to school / o’clock. / eight (Sắp xếp câu thành câu hoàn chỉnh)
...............................................................................................................................................
3.What time do she gets up ?
.............................................................................................................................................?
4. .................. many floors does it have ?(Tìm từ)
..............................................................................................................................................?
5. When do you have English?
.................................................................................................................................................
AnswerS key
§Ò I §Ò II

1 B A
I 2 B D
3 C D
4 D A
1 A C

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2 B C
3 D B
II 4 D B
5 A C
6 C D
7 B A
8 C D
1 get gets
2 does do
III 3 are is
4 listens listen
1 She lives in a house in the city She lives in a house in the city
2 Near her house, there is a Near her house, there is a supermarket, a
IV supermarket, a bank, a post office bank, a post office
3 No,She isn’t Yes,she is
4 She goes to school at six o’clock She goes to school at six o’clock
5 Yes,there are. No.there aren’t
1 Miss Hoa lives in the city or country? Miss Hoa lives in the city or country?
2 She goes to school at six o’clock I go to school at eight o’clock
V 3 get does
4 How How
5 I have history on ………….. I have English on …………..
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Period: 39 TEST CORRECTION
A . Teaching aims
By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to know what they did in the test.Therefore they get
more experience to study better.
B.Teaching aids: board,cards,…..
D.Procedures:
D.Procedures:
T calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes, from big to small mistakes

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- T asks Ss what they did in the test.What they did well and what they didn’t do well.What
they did but they didn’t know they are true or false.
- Calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes ,from big to small mistakes.
Question I: - All of Ss know how to pronounce so they choose right.
Eg:
Question II:
- There are many Ss choose exactly.
Eg: - Besides, there are some week Ss didn’t know how to choose right answers.
Eg:
Question III:
- All of Ss know how to divide verb
Eg:
Question IV:
- There are some Ss know how to rewrite the sentences,so they write very well.
Eg:
- Although,there are some Ss didn’t know how to rewrite these sentences so they didn’t write
true.
Eg:
Question V:
-All of Ss listen very well so they fill in the gaps exactly.
E- Consolidation:
F- Homework: - Prepare Unit7: Lesson 1
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 13. Ngày…. / …. / 2013.


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : / / 2013 WEEK14 Date of teaching : / / 2013


Unit 7:Your house.
Period 40. Lesson1: Is your house big ? (A1-A2).
A.Teaching aims
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to listen to a dialogue and read a letter about a
house to understand the details.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:photo, vegetable, garden.
2.Grammar:Simple present tense:Is there ........... ?Are there ...........?
IV.Teaching aids:lesson plan, textbook, cd,easy talk
V.Procedures:
1.Warm up.
- Greeting. - Kim's game:Look at the picture, try to remember the things and write them.
2.Check up.
3.New lesson.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
Activity 1:Listening. I.Listen.
1.Pre - listening: 1.Listen and complete the table
T sets the scene: T show the picture on page Yes No
72 and say: They are Minh and Hoa. Minh is ………big? v
asking about Hoa’s House. Before listening, I ………small? v
have a grid with some information. You ………a well? v
should stick in colums “ Yes” if it is right, and ………a yard? v
stick in column “ No” if it is wrong by ……….flowers? v
predicting. ………..trees? v
- Check understanding 2.Use the grid to talk about Hoa’s house
(?) Who are they? ( Minh and Hoa) - Example statements.
(?)What do you have to do now? Hoa’s house is small. It is not big. There is a
Ss: Predict and stick yard. There are flowers. There isn’t awell.
- Ss predict- T collects Ss’s ideas There aren’t trees.
2.While - Listening:
Ss listen to the tape then checktheirpredictions.
- T have Ss check their predictions.
After each student’ s answer. T plays the tape
again to check.
3. Post – listening
T asks Ss to use the grid to talk about Hoa’s
house.
Activity 2:Reading (A2) II. Reading (A2)
1.Pre - reading: Vocab. 1. Vocabulary.
T uses pictures on page 73 to teachvocabulary. - a garden(n): vườn
Ss read the vocabulary chorally, then - a vegetable(n): rau quả ( explanation)
individually. - a photo(n) : bức ảnh ( realia)
*Checking Vocab : R.O.R
* T/F prediction 2. Reading
T sets the scene: You are going to read Nga’s *. True or false statements.
letter which she writes to Lan. In the letter she a. The house is in the country
writes about her house. Before reading the b. There is a river near the house.
letter, you read the statements and tell me c. There are trees to the left of the house.
which sentence is true and which one is false d. There are two gardens.
- A - Ask a student to read all statements first.
Ss read and predict T or F. T gets Ss’ predic.
2.While - reading.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Ss read the letter on page 73 then check their * Keys.
predictions a. T c. F
* Comprehension questions. b. F d. T
(?)How many questions are there? (5)
How many answers are there?(5)
( ? )What do you have to do now? ( Match) *. Answer the questions.
Ss do matching (one by one) : T- corrects.
3. Post – reading * Answer key:
Group work : ask and answer the question a.D, b.A, c.E, d.B, e.C
(A2: a e) Example Exchange
4. Homework. S1: Is there a flower garden in front of the
Learn by heart Vocab. house?
- Do A 1, 2 ( P. 66- 67- workbook). S2: Yes, there is.
-Answers the questions.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Unit 7:Your house
Period:41. Lesson 2: Is your house big ? (A3-A5).
A.Teaching aims
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to practice the question with: “ Is there a …/ Are
there any …?” and short answers to describe the town.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:bank, clinic, post office, supermarket, shops
2.Grammar:Simple present tense: Is there a ........... ? Are there any ...........?
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, cd,easy talk
D.Procedures:
1.Warm up: - Greeting.
2. Old lesson: Answer the questions: Where is your house?
- Is your house is in the country? What are in the country? (a lake ,a rice paddy…. )
61……………………………………………… 62:……………………………………………..
3. New lesson :
Teacher and Ss’ activities Contents
1.Presentation: I.Presentation:1. Vocabulary.
+ Pre- teach: Vocab a bank(n): ngân hàng.
T uses the pictures/ synonym p.74 for a clinic(n): phòng khám.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

eliciting the new vocabulary. a post office(n): bưu điê ̣n.
Read Vocab chorally, individually a supermarket(n): siêu thị.
a shop(n): cửa hàng.
 checking Vocab. ROR any: nào cả.
2. Practice:  checking Vocab. ROR
- Review the structures : 2. Model sentences.
T: Have Ss practise the structure. a. What is that? -> It’s a hotel.
What is that ? It is a hotel. What are those?-> They are flowers.
Ss: Work in pairs. b.Is there a lake near your house?
T: Have Ss practise the structure - Yes, there is/ No, there isn’t.
Is there / Are there .. ? Are there any trees near your house?
Ss: Work in pairs. - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t.
II. Practice:
3.a(1) What is this ? It is a bank
(2) What are those? They are flowers.
(3) What is this? It is a supermarket.
3.b. Is there a bank near your house?
- No, there isn’t
- Is there a supermarketnear your school?
- Yes,there is .
Are there any flowers near your house?
Yes, there are.
*Exercise 4/ p.74 Exercise 4/ p.74.Look at the pictures .
T:Ask Ss to look at the pictures in A4 Choose one of the houses. Don’t your partner
and describe them which house. Ask questions to find which
S choose a picture and the others ask some house your partner chooses.
questions: Example:
- Are there any trees? S1: Are there any trees? S2: Yes, there are.
- Are they behind the house? S3: Are they behind the house?
…………….Then tell which house that is. S2: Yes, there are S3: Is this the picture 2?
S2: Yes, It is.
3.Production (A5). Exercise 5/p.75
T. ask Ss to look at the pictures of A4 again III. Production (A5).
Then T. reads a paragraph describing a
house. Ss listen then predict which h*
*Consolidation
- Ss nhắc lại cách hỏi đoán với “ Is there/
are there”

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Notes: ins’t = is not,Aren’t = are not
4.Homework
Learn by heart Vocab.
Draw a picture of a house then ask and
answer the questions about it.
Do A1-6 (p66- 67- work book).
- Prepare B1->4.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : / / 2013 Date of teaching : / / 2013
Unit 7:Your house
Period 42. Lesson3 : Town or country ? (B1-B3)
A.Teaching aims - By the end of the lesson , the Ss may read a text about Ba’s and Chi's
houses to understand the differences, to practice to describe where we live and complete the
table correctly.
B.Language contents:
1. Vocabulary:noisy, quiet, an apartment, market, zoo, paddy fields.
2. Grammar:Simple present tense.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, cd,easy talk
D.Procedures:
1.Warm up.- Greeting. - Game ( review some vocabulary ).
Slap the board:House, bank, hotel, restaurant, post office, store, hospital.
2. Old lesson: Look at the picture & answer the question.-What is that?-What are those?
61………………………………………………62:…………………………………………
3. New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
1.Pre - reading+Pre - teach: Vocab I.Pre - reading
T uses some techniques for eliciting : 1.Vocabulary.
(pictures and antonyms) noisy >< quiet (adj): ồn ào >< yên tĩnh.
( explanation) an apartment (n): căn hô ̣.
( picture) a zoo (n): vườn bách thú.
( picture) paddy fields= rice paddy(n):cánh đồng
( synonysm)
Ss read the Vocab chorally/ individually
* Checking Vocab : R.O.R
T sets the scene: You are going to read the II.Reading.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

texts about Ba’s apartment and Chi’s house. 1. Fill in the gaps with suitable words.
Before reading the texts, I want you to read Using the pictures.
the passage about Ba and Chi and fill in the Ba lives in an (1)………… in town. Near his
gaps with suitable words ( using the pictures) apartment, there is a supermarket, a post-
- Ss look at the pictures and fill in the gaps. office, ( 2)…………,a clinic, a market and a
- Ss “ look at the pictures and fill in the (3)………… . It is very (4)……………here
gaps  T. collects students’s ideas. Chi lives in a (5)…………in the country .
2.While- reading There aren’t any stores here. There are not
- Ss read the text on page (76/77) and read any (6)…here.There are trees and (7)
the text silently. Then check their ………….., a river , a lake and ( 8)
predictions above. ………………. It is very (9)……………in
- T. has students correct the false words the country.
- Ask 2 Ss to read the texts aloud. Keys1. apartment 4. noisy
2. a bank 5. house
3. zoo 6. stores
7. flowers. 8.quiet

* Answer the questions:B1/ P.76 2.Answer the questions


(?) How many number are there? - Play a game: Lucky Number
(?) How many questions/ LK numbers are Cat- Mouse
there? 1 2 3 4 5
(?) What happen if you choose a lucky N0? 6 7 8 9 10
Ss play in groups.
1. Does Ba live in town? ( Yes, he is)
2. Does he live in a house?( No, he doesn’t)
3. Is the country noisy?( No, it isn’t)
4. LK 5. LK
6. Does Chi live in town? 9 No, she doesn’t)
7. Are there any flowers?( Yes, there are)
9. LK
10. Is the country quiet?( Yes, it is)
3. Post- reading III. Post- reading.
Pair work: talk about places they live (open Eg: S1: “ Hello, I’m Lan. I live in apartment
pairs/ close pairs) in Hanoi
Eg: S1: “ Hello, I’m Lan. I live in apartment It is very noisy. Near my house, there are...”
in Hanoi S2: “ Hello. I’m Thu. I live in a house in the
It is very noisy. Near my house, there are…” country. It’s very quiet. Ear my house, there
S2: “ Hello. I’m Thu. I live in a house in the is a lake, a rice paddy and a………..”

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

country. It’s very quiet. Ear my house, there * Consolidation
is a lake, a rice paddy and a………..” List differences between life in town and life
* Consolidation in country
List differences between life in town and life - Ss play in groups
in country 1.Read&write(B2:Transformation writing):
- Ss play in groups Answers:
-In order to know more about Ba and Chi. Chi lives in a house in the country. Near her
We continue unit 7: B2,3. house, there aren’t any stores. It is very quiet.
- Have students read the text about Ba again. B3: Grid:
- Ask students to read the text about Chi and 2. Listen Answers:
write sentences about Chi’s house. Name Ci. T. C. Apart. House.
- Call students to read the sentences. Minh v x v x
- Listen and correct. Tuan x v x v
- Give the corrections. Nga v x v
- Have the students read the table. *Model sentences:
- Listen and check to complete the table. Do you live in town?
- Listen and correct. No. I live in the country.
- Give the corrections. Does he live in town?
- Ask students the questions: Where do you No. He lives in the country.
live?/ Do you live in town? 3.Practice:Word Cue Drill
- Have Ss listen and repeat. 1. town/ country 2. house/ apartment
- Give the model. 3. lake/ river 4. hospital/ factory
- Run through all these cues. 5. bank/ post office 6. supermaket / market
- Model the first cue. 7. shops/ paddy fields 8. zoo/ museum
- Have students practice the next cues. Example Exchanges:
- Fix the poster on the board. S1: Do you live in town?
- Have Ss look at the poster, ask and answer S2: No. I live in the country.
the questions then complete the table. S1:Do you live near a lake?
( Teacher models first ) S2: No. I live near a river.
4.Further practice:(Find someone who)
Find someone who lives… Name
… in town … in the country
… near a lake … next to a market
… opposite a paddy field
… near a post office
Example Exchange:
S1: Do you live in town?
S2: No, I don’t/ Yes, I do.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

S1: What is your name?
4.Homework S2:…..S1: How do you spell it?
Learn by hear Vocab
Write a paragraph describing place where
you live.
DoB1(66-67) workbook ,Do B2(77)
textbook.
Learn vocabulary by heart.Practice again.
- Prepare the next part C1+C3.
E.Give experience
.......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................

Duyê ̣t tuần 14.Ngày…. / …./ 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : 22 / 11 / 2012 WEEK 15 Date of teaching: / 11/ 2012


Unit 7:Your house
Period 43 Lesson 4 :On the move (C1,C3)
A.Teaching aims :- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to use the simple present <
How> questions and “ by car/ bike/ train” to talk about transportation.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: bike, motorbike, bus, car, train, plan.
2.Grammar:Simple present tense.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, cd,easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up:- Greeting.
2. Old lesson :talk about Chi& Ba & answer about you.
-Do you live in the country?
-Is there a lake near your house?
61……………………………………………… 62:
……………………………………………..
3. New lesson
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
-In order to know how to ask and answer I.Presentation:+ Pre- teach vocabulary:
about transportation. We come to part C by bike (n): bằng xe đạp
On the move ( C123 ). by bus (n): bằng xe buýt
- The first we come to vocabulary. by motorbike (n): bằng xe máy
- Elicit to teach vocabulary by car (n): bằng xe hơi
- Control Ss to practice vocabulary. by train (n): bằng tàu thuỷ
- Check vocabulary ( what and where ). by plane (n): bằng máy bay
- Fix the pictures on the board and ask Ss: + Presentation Text:Model sentences:
How many pictures are there? How do you go to school?
- Have Ss listen and repeat. How does he travel to work?
- Have Ss practice in pairs. I travel/ go by bike.
- Give the model sentences. He travels/ goes by car.
II.Practice:Substitution Drill:
Picture cue drill:
a. Lien/ bike b. Thu/ motorbike
-Run through all the pictures. c. Tuan/ bus d. Hoa/ car
e. Huong/ walk f. Mr Hai/ train
-Model the first cue. g. Mrs Lan/ plane
Example Exchanges:
-Have Ss practice the next cues. S1: How does Lien go to school?
S2: She goes by bike.
-Have Ss copy down. S1: How does Mr Hai travel to work?
S2: He travels by train.
III. Consolidation:Noughts and Crosses
Mrs Dung Mrs Lan Mr Hai
(plane) (bus) (train)
Lien Thu Tuan
(walk) (bike) (bus)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Mr Ba Mr Kim Hoa
- Control Ss to play a game: Noughts and (motorbike)(plane) (walk)
crosses. Ex: How does Mrs Dung travel to work?
4.Homework: She travels by plane.
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Practice again.
- Prepare the next part C3- 4.
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Unit 7: Your house
Period 44 .Lesson 5 : On the move.(C4-C5).
A.Teaching aims :- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to read a text about
Hoang’s daily routine for further practice in simple present habitual actions.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:review vocabulary.
2. Grammar:Simple present tense.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, cd,easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up.
2.Check up: Write vocabulary& answer the queston
-How do you go to school?
3.New lesson.
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
- Vocabulary (Matching) I. Pre- reading1. Vocabulary .
- Ask Ss to take turns to go to the board toBike Tàu hỏa
do the matching. Motorbike Đi bô ̣
- Ss do matching ( one for each) Plane Xe đạp
- Have Ss read the words again. Train Xe máy
Open – prediction: Bus Đi lại
(Grid with answer key) Car ô tô
- Ss predict what time Hoang does the Walk Máy bay
following things Travel Xe buýt
2. While – reading: II. Reading
C4: “ Hi, My name is Hoang…………” P.80 1. Complete the table.
Ss read silently then check their predictions What time?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Comprehension Question – C4 P. 80 He gets up at 5.30
( af) He leaves the at 6.30
Lucky Number Game house at 7.00
1. What time does Hoang get up ? School starts at 11.15
2. What time do you get up? School ends
3. What time does Hoang go to school> He has lunch
4. Lucky Numbeer 2. Answer the questions.
5. How do you go to school? ( Poster). Lucky numbers.
6. Does Hoang go to school by car? 1 2 3 4 5
7. Lucky Number 6 7 8 9 10
8. Lucky Number Tiger ----------------Lion
9. What time do your classes start? 2. Answer the questions.
10. What time do you have lunch? ( Poster). Lucky numbers.
+ T’s instruction  check 1 2 3 4 5
+ Play in groups ( tiger/ Lion) 6 7 8 9 10
Tiger ----------------Lion
Ss work in pairs to ask what time do their III. Post- reading
friends do the things above? Then go to Survey
the board to fill in the Grid What time?
Example Exchange Get up Time Name
S1: What time do you get up? Go to 5.00 Lan
S2: I get up at 5.00 school
S2: My name is Lan Classes
4.Homework start
Revise Vocab Go home
Write a paragraph about your daily Have lunch
routine.
Do C4(71).
Guide: Write a paragraph about your daily
routine.
Example: I’m Huong. I’m a student. I
learn at Binh Chan secondary school.
Everyday I get up at 6. I go to school at
6.20………………..
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Unit 8: Out and about.
Period 44. Lesson1: What are you doing ? (A1-A3).

A.Teaching aims : - By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to use the present
progressive positive statements with I / She / He to talk about actions happening now, use
the present progressive to talk about actions happening now and use question with Wh.
B.Language contents:
-Grammar: The present progressive tense.
-Vocabulary: video game, ride, drive, wait.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, cd,easy talk
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up. Hangman:MOTORBIKE
2. Check up. answer the question: What time do you go to school?
How do you go to school?
61………………………………………………62:
…………………………………………….
3. New lesson.
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
Lead in: I.Presentation:
- Ask students some questions: 1.Vocabulary.
What do you do after school? (to) play video games: ch¬i trß ch¬i
What about you? Do you watch TV after ®iÖn tö.
school? (to) ride a bike : ®i xe ®¹p.
How about now? What are you doing - (to) drive a car : l¸i xe « t«.
now? We come to Unit 8 ( A1) - (to) wait for : ®îi chê .
- The first we come to vocabulary.
- Elicit to teach vocabulary. 2.Model sentences
- Control students to practice vocabulary.- I am playing games.
- Check vocabulary.( slap the board ) (I'm)
- Fix the pictures ( three pictures ) - He/She is riding a bike
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures a,b,c. He’s/ She’s driving
- Ask: what is this student doing?
Have the Ss look at the pictures and (+)Form: S + be + V.ing.
explain about actions happening now: ( am/is/are)
Ex: playing video games, riding a bike. (+)Use: Present Progressive is expressed the
- Have Ss listen to the tape and repeat. actions happaing now.
- Call Ss to read again. Eg: What are you doing?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Give the model sentences. - I'm waiting for my teacher.
II. Practice:
- Run through all word cues drill. Word cue drill:
1. walk to school 2. drive a car
- Model the first cue. 3. ride a bike 4. wait for a bus
5. play video games 6. travel by bus
- Have Ss practice the next cues. Example Statements:
1. I’m walking to school.
2. He’s driving a car.
- Have Ss copy down. III. Production:
a. I / go /school.
-Write some words on the board and ask b. She /walk / work.
Ss to make sentences. c. He /live / an apartment.
d. Ba /travel /work.
- Have Ss go to the board and do. e. They/ wait for a train
- Correct the mistakes. Ex: I am going to school.
- Give the corrections. Noughts and crosses
walk/school drive/bus travel/bus
Control Ss to play a game: Noughts and wait/train ride/bike play/game
crosses. go/plane drive/car ride/moto.
- Have Ss choose a letter and make Example: I’m walking to school.
sentence. + Remember:
- Remind the present progressive tense. The present progressive tense:
- Fix three pictures continue. S + BE + V_ing
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and guess ( am, is, are )
what the people are doing. I. Presentation *Model sentences:
- Give:< to wait> always go with He is playing video game
preposition < for >. She is riding her bike
Ex: I am waiting for a bus. We are walking to school.
- Have Ss listen two times and repeat. They are walking to school.
- Call Ss to read the sentences again. II. Practice:
- Give the model sentences. Picture cue drill:
- Fix the pictures again. Ex:S1: What are you doing?
- Run through all the pictures. S2: We are walking to school.
- Model the first picture. S1: What are they doing?
- Ask Ss ask and answer in pair. S2: They are riding their bike.
- Call some pairs to ask and answer *Model sentences:
before the class. What is he/ she doing?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Ask students to look at the pictures in What are you/ they doing?
A1 again and answer the questions: A2:Look at the pictures, ask and answer
+ What is he(she) doing? the questions:
+ What are they (you)doing? Ex: S1: What is he doing?
- Ask Ss to read again the questions S2: He is playing video games.
which the teacher has just used. Ex:S1: What are you doing?
- Give the model sentences. S2: I’m speaking
- Have Ss ask and answer in pair( look at A3: Answer and write the answers in
the pictures in A1) your notebook:
- Have Ss ask and answer with the Ex: What are you doing?
question: What are you doing? I’m writing.
- Call some pairs to give the answer + Remember:The present progressives:
before the class.
- Ask Ss to do the exercises in A3 and S + BE + V_ing
write the answers in their notebooks.
- Call Ss to read the answers before the
class.
- Remind the present progressive tense
again.
4.Homework:
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Do the exercises at home.
- Make five sentences, using the present
progressive tense with: We, They.
- Prepare the next part A4->7.
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......
Duyê ̣t tuần 15. Ngày 23/11/ 2012

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation :29 / 11 / 2012 Week 16 Date of teaching: /12 / 2012

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Unit 8: Out and about.
Period46.Lesson 2 : What are you doing ? (A4-A6)
A.Teaching aims - By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to use the present
progressive <Wh> Questions with she / he / they to talk about actions happening now.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: businessman and review vocabulary.
2.Grammar: The present progressive tense.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, CD,easy talk
D.Procedures:
1.Warm up:
2.Check up:Look at the picture answer the question & write.
3.New lesson :
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
1.A4: Listen and number the picture 1.A4: Listen and number the picture as
as your hear: your hear:
Have Ss look at the pictures in A4,
-Ask SS to talk about each picture
-listen and number the picture as they Answer key:
hear. 1-b, 2-f, 3-d, 4-a, 5-c, 6-e.
2.A6: Read then answer the 2.A6: Read then answer the questions:
questions: Answers given:
- Have Ss listen to the tape( three a.1. Who is that?
times) That is Mr Ha.
- Have Ss give the answers. 2. What does he do?
- Listen and correct. He is a businessman.
- Give the corrections 3. Where is he going?
Ask SS to write the sentences that you He is going to Ha Noi.
hear 4. How is he traveling?
T monitor & correct He is traveling by plane.
Introduce the questions with Who, b, c
What, Where, How.
- Ask Ss to read the example then ask
and answer, using these question
words.
- Give the answers
4.Homework:
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Do the exercises at home.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Prepare B1.
- Listen and correct.
-Give the corrections.
- T model
- Ss do the same with b&c
- Work in pair
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..
………………………………………………………………………………………………
….
Unit 8: Out and about
Period 47. Lesson3: Truck driver (B1).
A.Teaching aims:- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to read a picture story
about a truck drive to understand the main ideas and details.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:truck driver, farmer, load, unload, foodstall, arrive at.
2.Grammar:The present progressive tense.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, CD ,easy talk
V.Procedures:
1.Warm up:- Greeting: S + Be + V-ing
- Call two students to go to the board.
- Each student writes three sentences, using the present progressive.
What do you do every day? How about you?
Do you do the housework? Are you happy to do it?
2.Check up:Look at the picture /85 read & answer the question
61………………………………………………62:
…………………………………………….
3.New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
I.Pre- reading 1.Vocabulary:
- First we come to vocabulary. a truck driver (n): ngêi l¸i xe t¶i
- Elicit to teach vocabulary. a farmer (n): ngêi n«ng d©n
-Control students to practice vocabulary. (to) load (v): chÊt hµng lªn
(to) unload (v): dì hµng xuèng
a food stall (n): quÇy b¸n thùc phÈm
(to) arrive at (v): ®Õn
- Check vocabulary by matching Matching:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

a.quầy bán thực phẩm b.người lái xe tải
b.dỡ hàng xuống d.chất hàng lên
e.đến f.n«ng d©n
2.B1:Listen and read.Then ask and
- Who is this? answer the questions.
- Yes. This is Mr Quang. He is a truck Odering statements:
driver. In order to know what he does 1. going to Hanoi
and where he goes. We come to B1. 2. meeting the farmer
- Use the poster. 3. having breakfast
- How many numbers are there? 4. going to a farm
- These are the activities which Mr 5. loading vegetables
Quang does but they are not in the 6. unloading the truck
correct order. You read and guess to
order. II.While- reading:
II.While- reading Answer key:a.4, b.2, c.5, d.1, e.6, f.3
Have S listen to the tape.( close your Comprehension Questions:
book) a. Mr Quang is a truck driver.
- Open your book, read and check. b. He is going to a farm.
- Listen and correct. c. A farmer is waiting for him.
- Give the corrections. d. He is taking the vegetables to the
market.
e. He is eating his breakfast.
f. He is eating at a foodstall.
3.Production Word cues drill
III.Post - reading: a. You / read book (x)
-Do you like playing a game? b. Lan / watch TV (v)
- Control Ss to ask and answer the c. He/ play soccer (x)
questions by lucky number. d. They/ do their homework (v)
-work in group talk about Mr Quang
again
-T monitor & correct
-T eliciting the words
IV. Homework:
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Do the exercises at home.
- Prepare B2.
E.Give experience.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

..................................................................................................................................................
..
………………………………………………………………………………………………
….
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Unit 8: Out and about
Period 48. Lesson3: Truck driver (B2).
A.Teaching aims:- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to read the dialouge
between Lan & Ba using the progressive in the negative .
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: math ,correct ,work
2.Grammar:The present progressive tense.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, CD ,easy talk
V.Procedures:
1.Warm up:
2.Check up: Look at the picture /86 read & answer the question
61………………………………………………62:
…………………………………………….
3.New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
I.Pre- reading 1.Vocabulary:
- First we come to vocabulary. math (n) : môn Toán
- Elicit to teach vocabulary. work (n) : công viê ̣c
-Control students to practice vocabulary. (to) copy(v) : sao chép
(to) correct (v) : sửa lỗi
- Check vocabulary by ROR
II.While- reading 2.Read the dialouge .Answer the
Have S listen to the tape.( close your question
book) a. Ba is doing his homework
- Open your book, read and check. b. Yes, he is
- Listen and correct. c. No, he isn’t
- Give the corrections. d. He is playing soccer
e. No, they aren’t
+ Câu hỏi có phải ai đó đang làm gì
không?
- Are you doing math?
- Yes, I am. / No, I’m not.
- Is he playing soccer?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Yes, he is. / No, he isn’t.
* The nghi vấn của thì hiê ̣n tại tiếp diễn
Be + S + Ving + N ?
III.Post - reading: B2, page 87 Yes, S + be. / No , S + be not.
Role playLan: What are you doing? 3.Production Word cues drill
- Ba: I’m doing my homework. Students to work in pairs to practice
- Lan: Are you doing math? asking and answering . One student plays
- Ba: Yes, I am. the role of Lan and anotherplay the role
- Asks students to work in pairs to of Ba.
practice asking and answering.One -some pairs demonstrate before the class.
student plays the role of Lan and - Put attention to the teacher.
anotherplay the role of Ba. - Students practice the dialogue in pairs.
Calls some pairs demonstrate before the (v)
class.
Gives feedback and correct( their
pronunciation / intonation).
- Asks them to work in pairs to practice
the dialogue.
4. Homework:
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Do the exercises at home.
- Prepare C1-2.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..
………………………………………………………………………………………………
….

Duyê ̣t tuần 16 . Ngày 30 /11/ 2012


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation :6 / 12 / 2012 Week 17 Date of teaching: / 12 / 2012


Unit 8: Out and about
Period 49. Lesson 4 : Road signs.(C1-C2)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to use: can/ can’t statements and traffic
vocabulary to talk about what you are allowed and not allowed to do on the road.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: policeman, difficult, sign, one-way, park, turn left, turn right, go straight.
2.Grammar:Modal verb: can and cannot/ can’t
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk.
D.Procedures:
1.Warm up
2.Check up
Read the dialouge & answer the question
61………………………………………………62:
…………………………………………….
3.New lesson
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
I.Presentation: I.Presentation:
Where do you live? + Pre- teach:Vocabulary:
Is Tra Binh in the country or in the city? road sign (n): biÓn b¸o giao th«ng
Do you often go to the city? park (v): ®ç xe
If you go to the city, what do you need to turn (v) : rÏ
notice? In order to know about that we ahead (adv) : vÒ phÝa tríc
come to part C. job(n) : nghÒ nghiÖp
- First we come to vocabulary. difficult (adj) : khã kh¨n
- Elicit to teach vocabulary. policeman (n) : c«ng an
Control students to practice vocabulary. go into : ®i vµo
Check vocabulary by rub out and way (n) : con ®êng
remember. one way : ®êng mét chiÒu
-We come to: Listen and read. say (v) : nãi
- Introduce some road signs. something (pro) : mét c¸i g×
- Have Ss look at some road signs and + Presentation Text:
guess what these signs are, using can/ Comprehension Questions:
can’t. 1. What does Hoan do?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Have Ss listen to the tape. 2. Is his job difficult?
- Open the book, read and check. Tell me why ( in Vietnamese )
- Give the questions, ask Ss read the 3. What does this sign mean?
questions, read the passages again and 4. What does this sign mean?
think the answers. Model sentences:
- Listen and correct. You can park here.(được phép)
-Give the corrections. You can’t go into that street.(không được
-Give the model sentences. phép)
- Have Ss look at 4 signs in C2 and
complete the sentences, using can or
can’t. II. Practice:
- Listen and correct. Answers:
- Give the corrections. a. You can turn left.
II. Practice: b. You can’t turn right.
- Have Ss practice in pairs, ask and c. You can go ahead.
answer: d. You can’t ride a motorbike.
S1: What does the sign say? III. Further Practice:
S2: It says “ you can turn left”. Answers: + You can turn right.
- Fix some road signs on the board. + You can’t turn left.
- Ask Ss to make the sentences, using: + You can’t ride a bike.
can or can’t. + You can’t park here.
- Call some Ss to go to the board and do. * Remember:
- Have Ss copy down. S + can + V …
S + can’t + V …

4.Homework:
- Learn vocabulary by heart.
- Do the exercises at home.
- Prepare C3->6.
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Unit 8: Out and about
Period 50. Lesson5 : Road signs (C3-C6).

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

A.Teaching aims:
- By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to read a text about Road Signs to understand
Must and Mustn’t for obligation / prohibition.
B.Language contents:
1.Vocabulary : dangerous, accident, intersection, slow down, go fast, warn, help.
-2.Grammar : Modal verb: Must and Must not / Mustn’t.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook,easy talk.
D.Procedures:
1.Warm up:
2. Check up:+Write vocabulary and make sentences
61………………………………………………62:
…………………………………………….
3. New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
I.Pre - reading:Lead in: I.Pre - reading:
Use the picture:Where is it?
Yes, How we should go at the intersection.
Today we come to part C3-4.
+ Pre - teach:Vocabulary: + Pre - teach:Vocabulary:
- First we come to vocabulary. road (n) : con ®êng
- Elicit to teach vocabulary. dangerous (adj): nguy hiểm
- Control students to practice vocabulary. accident (n) : tai nạn
- Check vocabulary by rub out and discipline (n ):
remember. help(v) : gióp ®ì
warn(v) : c¶nh b¸o
fast(adv) nhanh ≠ slow
stop (v) : dõng l¹i
slow down (v) : gi¶m tèc ®é
intersection (n): giao lé
II.While - reading:
II.While - reading:
- Have Ss look at three road signs in the
book ( page 90 ) and ask:
- Do you know these road signs?
Have Ss guess the meaning of these road
signs.
- Have Ss read the text and find the name
of these road signs.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Ask Ss: What should you do when you
see these road signs?
- Listen and correct.
- Give the corrections. III. Post - reading:
III. Post - reading: a. Slow down .V Go straight
- Have Ss notice how to use and the b. Turn left. V Don’t turn
meaning of must and mustn’t. left
- Call Ss to read the text. c. Turn right Go straight or turn
left V
Have Ss look at the pictures in C4 and d. Slow down Don’t go straight
choose the correct statement for each one. ahead V
e. Park here Don’t park here V
f.Cars and trucks gohereV
Motorbike go here
g. Don’t go straight
- Have Ss listen to the tape. Don’t turn right or left V
- Have Ss listen to the tape again and give h. Park here V Don’t park
which road sign is first/ second/ third … here.
- Listen and correct. Answers:1-c: You can’t turn right here.
- Give the corrections. 2-d: There’s a stop sign. I must stop.
3-h: You can’t park your car here.
4-a: You must slow down. There’s an
intersection ahead.
5-g:You can enter that road. Look at the
sign.
6-b: We can turn left here.
4.Homework: 7-f: You can’t ride motorbike on this
- Learn vocabulary by heart. street.
- Do exercises at home. + Remember:
- Prepare Grammar Practice. S + must + V …S + mustn’t + V …
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......
Unit 8: Out and about
Period 51. Lesson6: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
A.Teaching aims:
Help the students to review vocabulary and grammar from unit 6 to unit 8.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

B.Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: Review vocabulary and some basic sentences.
2. Grammar: - Present simple tense, Present progressive tense, Prepositions, Question
words,Must and Mustn’t , Can and Can’t.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, exercises.
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up: sing a song
2. Check up: write vocabulary& talk about the road signs
6 ………………………………………………62:
1

…………………………………………….
3. New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
Activity 1: The simple present. 1.Present simple tense.
- T asks Ss to repeat some verbs of talk + Form:S + V(s/es).
about means of travelling. + Use: to express an everyday action.
Ss: “go, travel,walk and question word + Adverbs:
How”. always/ usually/ often/sometime/
_ Notice the use of the tense: to express never…
an everyday action. - every day/week/month/year.
+Use? + Answer key:
+ adverbs? a, How do you go?/ I go to school by bus
- Ask Ss to do Ex1/p92. b, How does he travel to Hanoi? / He
- Ss work pairs to do. travels by plane.
- Give feedback-> check. c, Do you walk to school? – No. I don’t
Activity 2: The Present progressive walk to school.
tense. 2.The Present progressive tense.
- Review of formation: I am/ You, We, + Form:I + am +
They are…., He/ She/ It is………+ Ving. You/ They/ We + are + Ving
. The Use : To express an action He/ She / It + is +
happening at the same time or around the + Answer key:
time or around the time as we are talking. a, Minh is riding his bike.
b, They are waiting for a bus.
c, She is watching television.
d. We are playing soccer.
e, He is listening to music.
f, They are walking to school.
g, He is travelling to Ha noi.
3.Preposition. 3. Preposition: Complete the exercise

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Have Ss look at the picture and ask the with the words in the box.
question like this: “ What do you see in + Answer key:
the picture?/ What is the girl doing?/ and Is/ in front of/ behind/ opposite/ to the
the boy? left of/ to the right of.
- Ask Ss to read the list of words and
give the meanings.
4.Question words: 4.Question words.
- Ask Ss to repeat some questions words * Wh questions( C©u hái cã tõ ®Ó hái)
and their uses they’ve learnt. 1. Wh- words:
- Ss repeat: Where/ Who/ What/ How/ Where : ë ®©u ( hái vÒ n¬i chèn)
How old/ When/ What time……. Who : ai ( hái vÒ ngêi)
What: g×, c¸i g× ( hái cho vËt, hµnh
®éng)
How : nh thÕ nµo ( hái vÒ søc kháe)
How old : bao nhiªu tuæi( hái vÒ tuæi)
When : khi nµo( hái vÒ thêi gian)
What time : mÊy giê ( hái vÒ giê)
How many + Dt ®Õm ®îc ë sè
nhiÒu......?
- Then asks Ss to do exercise 4/p93. How much + Dt kh«ng ®Õm ®îc.....?
-Ss work in pairs to do. bao nhiªu( hái vÒ sè lîng).
- Give feed back/ correct. Exercise 4/p93:
+ Answer key:
+ Exercise 5/P. 94. a, Where, b, Who, c, What, d, What
Ss work in pairs to do. Exercise 5/P95.
- Give feed back/ correct. + Answer key:A, play/ playing
B, rides/ is riding
4.Homework. C, go/ are going
Revise the simple present/ the present D, drive/ is driving.
continouse tense.
Redo all exercises
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......

Duyê ̣t tuần 17. Ngày 7 / 12 / 2012


TTCM

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation :13 / 12 / 2012 Week 18 Date of teaching: / 12 / 2012


Period 52 review the first term
A. Teaching aims:By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points
and vocabulary better. To revise grammar points from Unit 1 to Unit 8
B.Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: Review vocabulary and some basic sentences.
2. Grammar
C. Teaching aids:
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up :
2New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
Act1: Present simple I. Simple present tense.
- Get Ss to repeat the form of the verb 1.Tobe. am/is/are.
"tobe" and make up examples. am + I
To be is + he, she, it, N.
are + we, you, they, Ns.
+ S + am/is/are…..
- S + am/is/are not…..
? Am/Is/Are + S +….. ?
Eg: She is a teacher.
She is not a teacher.
Is she a teacher?
Yes, she is. / No, she isn't.
- Get Ss to repeat the form of ordinary 2. Ordinary verbs: V/ V-s / V-es.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

verbs. V + I, we, you, they, Ns.
- Get them to give example. V-s,es + he, she, it, N.
- Get Ss to repeat the way to add s and Eg: She goes to school.
es. She doesn't go to school.
Does she go to school?
Yes, she does. / No, she doesn't.
* Note.
- Eat  Eats
- Come  Comes
- Go  Goes; Miss  Misses; Wash 
Washes; Watch  Watch es.
- Play  Plays; Fly  Flies
- Give exercises and guide Ss to do. Ex1: Put the verbs in the present
- Call some Ss to do on the board and simple tense.
others do on their notebooks. 1. My friend (be) a good friend.
2. your father (get) up at five every
morning?
3. Our house (have) a flower garden.
4. Nam (do) his homework every day.
5. She (not play) games after school.
6. the children (go) to bed at nine?
7. Where your father (work)?
8. Minh often (watch) TV.
9. We (not listen ) to music at school.
10. Lan and Mai (be) students.
11. Nga (wait) for a bus here every day.
12. (Be) there any trees around your
house?
II. Present progressive tense.
* Act2: Present progressive * Form:
- Get Ss to repeat the form and using of Eg: She is watching television now.
the present continuous tense.
- Get Ss to give example. S + tobe + V + ing + O.
* Using:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Express an action, which is happening
now.
- In sentences usually have: "now, at the
moment, at present".
Ex2: Put the verbs in the present
- Give exercises and guide Ss to do. simple tense.
- Call some Ss to do on the board and 1. I (live)…… in Long Giang at present.
others do on their notebooks
2. We (do) ……… homework now.
3. They (not sing)….. an English song
now.
4. you (work) ……..at the moment?
5. She (play) ……..badminton now.
6. Look! My brother (buy) some new
books.
7. Listen! The dog (bark) the strange
man.
8. I (not teach)……………now
9. We (not wash) …………up at present.
10 They (not run) ………behind him
now.
11. you (sleep) …………..now?
12. she (help)…………… her mother
now?
Ex3: Complete the following sentences
with suitable words.
a) She ................to school everyday.
b) Lan is ...........to school now.
c) I like ..............
4. Home work (2’) d) My ................is Hoa.
- Review all form for the first term e) How .............are you? I am 12.
- Redo exercises in workbook. f) There ............an orange on the table
E.Give experience

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Period 53 review the first term
A. Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice the structures in real situations.
B.Language contents:
1. Vocabulary: Review vocabulary and some basic sentences.
2. Grammar
C. Teaching aids:
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up :
2New lesson:
Teacher and Ss’activities Contents
Get Ss to repeat the form and give 1.Introduce one's name
example. Eg: I am Mai.
My name is Mai.
I am name.
My name is
2. Ask and answer about one's age.
- Give the situations - Get Ss to say the Eg: How old are you?
form and use. I am twelve years old.
- Get them to give example. How old + be + S?
S + be + number + year(s)
old.
3.Ask and answer one's name.
Eg: What is your name?
My name is Lan.
What is + TTSH + name?
TTSH + name is + tên.
- Do the same way (2) 4.Ask and answer about one's address.
Eg: Where do you live?
I live on Tran Phu Street.
Where do / does + S + live?
S + live / live + on / in / at ...
5. This/ that/ these/ those.
Eg: This/That is Hoa.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

This pen is short.
* This/That + is / N.
This/ That + is (not) + N.
Is this/ that + N?
Yes, it is. / No, it is not.
* These/ Those + are/ Ns.
These/ Those + are (not) + Ns.
Are these/ those + Ns?
Yes, they are. / No, they aren't.
* What is this/ that?  It is + a/ an + N.
* What are these/ those? They are +
Ns
* Who is this/ that?  It is + name.
* Who are these/ those/ they?
- Get Ss to do exercise. They are + name + and + name +
and...
Ex1: Complete the following sentences
with suitable words.
1, I .......... Linh.
2, My .......... is Ha.
3, How .........are you? I am ten years
old.
4, Where ..........you live?
5, What .......... her name?
4. Home work (2’) 6, This .......... my book.
- Review all form for the first term 7, .......... those his pens?
- Redo exercises in workbook. 8, ......... is this? It is Trang.
9, .......... is that? It is an eraser.
10, What are……..? They are book
E.Give experience
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
......
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Period 54. THE FIRST TERM ENGLISH TEST
( Theo đề thi và đáp án của phòng )
A.Teaching aims:
To give sts a chance to practice what they have studied during the first semester.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

B. Language contents:
1. Vocabulary :
2. Grammar :
C. Teaching aids:
D. Procedure
1. Old lesson
2. New lesson

Duyê ̣t tuần 18 . Ngày 14/ 12/ 2012

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến


Date of preparation : 3 /1 /2013 WEEK 20 Date of teaching 61: 7 / 1 / 2013
62: 7 / 1 / 2013
UNIT 9: THE BODY
Period 55. Lesson 1: PARTS OF BODY ( A1-2 )
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to know nouns to talk about Parts of the body.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: head, chest, shoulder, arm, hand, leg, foot, finger, toe
2. Grammar: review the structures: What is that?That is his head.
What are those?Those are his fingers.
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 96, 97 and cassette.
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up
2 Check up (no)
3. New lesson
Teacher's activities Contents
* Presentation: * Presentation:
- Can you tell me the name of the Parts 1.Vocabulary:
of the body? head (n): ñaàu
In order to know about them, today we chest (n): ngực
come to Unit 9, part A1-2. shoulder (n) : Vai
- First we learn vocabulary. arm (n): cánh tay
- Use the picture of a person to elicit hand (n): bàn tay
and teach vocabulary. leg (n): chân

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Have the Ss practice the vocabulary. foot- feet (n) : bàn chân
- Control the Ss check vocabulary by finger (n): ngón tay
asking and answering. toe (n): ngón chân
+ check: ask and answer
Write the model on the board and ask What is that?That is his leg.
the Ss to repeat. What are those?Those are fingers.
Practice 2.Practice:
- Ask the Ss to practice in pairs part Ex: What is that? That is his head.
A2, using the picture ask and answer. What are those?Those are his arms.
- Call some students to go to the board, - Ex: “ head”
ask and the Ss in the class answer. “ hand”
- Prepair two person pictures by “ finger”
papers, separate the Parts of the body.
* Production: * Production:
- Divide the class into 2 groups. + Guessing game:
- Give each group a person picture is Ex:
separated. 1. It is on the top of your body. What is
- Have the students listen to the it?
teacher, go to the board and fix into a 2. They are at the end of your legs. What
person on the board, which group is are they?
faster, that group will win. 3. It is between your arms. What is it?
- Control the Ss to play games: 4. They are on your hands. What are
guessing game, noughts and crosses. they?
+ Noughts and crosses:
- Control the Ss to play a game. chest head shoulder
* Homework: feet fingers hands
- Have the Ss write the homework toes arms legs
* Homework:
- Learn vocabulary about the Parts of the
body by heart
- Practice at home by ask and answer.
- Prepare A3-4.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 3 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61 : 9 / 1 / 2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

62 : 8 /1 /2013
UNIT 9: THE BODY
Period 56. Lesson 2: PARTS OF BODY ( A3-4 )
A.Teaching aims:By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to learn adjectives to
describe Physical Appearance.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary : tall, short, thin, fat, heavy, light.
2. Grammar : S + be + adjective. Ex: He is fat.She is thin.
C.Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 97, 98 and cassette.
D. Procedures:
1. Warm up:Brainstorm:Parts of the body Group A Group B
- Head - Arm
- Shoulder - Foot
2.Old lesson call 2 students to write the new words
61 : …………………………………….. . 62 : ………………………………...
.
3. New lesson
Teacher's activities Contents
* Presentation: * Presentation:
- These are the parts of the body who we
have learnt.
- Whole class look at here and answer:
- How many people are there?
- How is she/ he?
Yes, today we learn to describe physical
appearance.
- In order to know about that, we come
to part A3-4. 1.Vocabulary:
- First we learn vocabulary. tall (adj) : cao
- Elicit and teach vocabulary. short (adj) : thấp
- Have the Ss practice the vocabulary. fat (adj) :béo
- Control the Ss to check vocabulary by thin (adj) : gầy
rub out and remember. heavy (adj) :nă ̣ng
- Have the Ss listen to the tape (A3) and light (adj) : nhẹ
repeat. + Check vocabulary:
- Ask the Ss to judge how to describe
the appearance of the people. Model sentence: S + be + adj.
- Write the model sentence on the board.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

* Practice: * Practice:
- Have the Ss look at the picture, listen True/ False Repetition Drill (A4)
to the teacher to read the sentence, if it Teacher:
is right you repeat, if it is wrong you Pa: She’s thin She’s tall
silent. Ss: ( repeat ) ( repeat )
Pb: He’s thin He’s short
Ss: ( silent ) ( repeat )
Pc: He’s small He’s tall
Ss: ( silent ) ( repeat )
Pd: She’s slim She’s tall
Ss: ( silent ) ( silent )
She’s short She’s fat
( repeat ) ( repeat )
Answer:1-d ;2-c;3-b;4-a
* Production:
Ex: I’m tall. Lan is tall, too.
* Production: Ha is short and fat.
- Have the Ss listen to the tape (two Noughts and crosses:
times) and write the order (1.2.3.4) of tall old fat
the people described. thin heavy big
- Call some of the students to give the light short new
answers. + Remember:
- Have the Ss listen again and check the
answers. S + be + adj
- Have the Ss practice in groups ( each
group is about 10-15 students), describe
themselves and their friends.
Control the Ss to play a game: noughts
and crosses. * Homework:
- Remind the model sentence. - Learn vocabulary by heart.
* Homework: - Write the sentences to describe the
- Have the Ss write the homework people in your family.- Prepare A5, 6.

E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation: 3 /1 / 2013 Date of teaching 61 : 11 / 1 / 2013


62 : 9 /1 /2013
UNIT 9: THE BODY
Period 57. PARTS OF BODY (A5-6)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to ask & answer about a person
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: gymnast,weight lifter, weak, strong .
2.Grammar: Review
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, pictures page 100 and cassette.
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up : greeting
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words & discribe a person in part 4
61 :……………………………….. 62: ………………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher's activities Contents
* Presentation: * Presentation:
- Whole class look at here and answer:
- How many people are there?
- How is she/ he?
Yes,today we learn to describe physical
appearance.
In order to know about that, we come to 1.Vocabulary:
part 5-6 Gymnast(n) : vâ ̣n đô ̣ng viên thể dục
- First we learn vocabulary. Weight lifter(n) vâ ̣n đô ̣ng viên cử tạ
- Elicit and teach vocabulary. Weak(adj) yếu
- Have the Ss practice the vocabulary. Strong(adj) mạnh
- Control the Ss to check vocabulary by rub + Check vocabulary:
out and remember.
- Have the Ss listen to the tape (A5) and
repeat.
- Ask the Ss to judge how to describe the
appearance of the people.
- Write the model sentence on the board. Model sentence: S + be + adj.
* Practice: * Practice:
-Ask & answer using picture Tuan & Chi A: Who is that?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- T model B: That is Chi
_ SS practice in pair A: what does she do?
- Doing the same with tuan B: She is a gymnast.
_ Ss practice in pair A: Is she short?
- Look at pictures in part A3&4 B:no, she isn’t. She is tall
Practice the same ……………………..
- Have the Ss practice in groups ( each Noughts and crosses:
group is about 10-15 students), describe tall old fat
themselves and their friends. thin heavy big
- Control the Ss to play a game: noughts light short new
and crosses.
- Remind the model sentence. + Remember:S + be + adj
* Homework: * Homework:
- Have the Ss write the homework Learn vocabulary by heart.
Write the sentences to describe the
people in your family.
Prepare B1.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....

Duyê ̣t tuần 20 . Ngày 4 / 1 / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : 10 /1 /2013 WEEK 21 Date of teaching 61: 14 / 1 / 2013


62: 14 / 1 / 2013
UNIT 9: THE BODY
Period 58. Lesson 4 :FACE (B1-3)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to know some parts of people’s face and
know how to describe people’s building and face.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: hair ,eye ,teeth,lips,mouth ,nose
2.Grammar: Review
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up : greeting
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher's and students Contents
activities
1. Warm up: (5 minutes)
Pelmanism:
fat tall heavy
big noisy - Do as T’s directions
thin short light
small quiet - Listen to T.
Introduce new lesson: In our
1.New words

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

today lesson, we are going to - Presents the parts of the face:
learn how to describe people’s eye (n): đôi mắt
face. nose (n) : mũi
2. Presentation: mouth :(n) miê ̣ng
Introduction (15 minutes) ear (n)tai
- Read the new words and ask lip (n) :môi
Ss to repeat in chorus. teeth (a tooth) :răng
Listen and write the new hair (n): tóc
words in their notebooks.- Ask * Slap the board:
Ss to read the words
individual.

* Slap the board:(use the 2. Practice


picture) - Present some more new words:
hair eye + round (adj) tròn + thin (adj):nhỏ
nose ear + oval (adj) trái xoan + long (adj) dài
lips teeth + full (adj) to,dày + short (adj) ngắn
mouth

Practice (10 minutes)


Ask Ss to look at the pictures
a) - f) P. 100 and describe
people in the pictures. * Word-square
Read the words as model and A I R X F F
ask Ss to repeat in chorus. N E F A T I
Ask Ss to read the words E O Y F E N
individual. A B S E E G
Listen and repeat. R T H E T E
- Read the words individual M O U T H R
- Slap theboard H E A V Y S
Further- Practice (10 - Find and circle the words.
minutes) (answer key)
* Word-square  hair, fat, see, the, mouth, out, heavy
- Ask Ss to describe one of  ear, arm, hear, toe, to, feet, teeth, fingers
their classmates.  nose, eye
- Call on some Ss to - Listen and remember.
describe in front of the class. - Write assignments.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Look at the pictures and
describe.
- Listen and write the new
words in their notebooks.
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)
- Recall the new words of
face.
- Listen and repeat.
- Read the words individual.
- Describe one of their
classmates.
- Describe in front of the class.
4. Homework: (2 minutes)
- Learn the new words by
heart.
- Describe the members in
your family.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 10 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61: 16 / 1 / 2013
62: 15 / 1 / 2013
UNIT 9: THE BODY
Period 59. Lesson 5 : FACE (B4-6)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise the words about parts of the body
and revise the way of describing people’s building.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: a round face , an oval,full lips ,thin lips ,long hair,short hair
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up : greeting
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ........................................... 62: ………………………………..
3.New lesson :

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Teacher’s a Students’ nd Content
activities
1. Warm up: (5 minutes)
Match the words: Match the words:
- Introduce new lesson: In our nose brown short
lesson we will continue full oval eyes
describing people’s building and face hair small
face. lips
2. Presentation: 1.New words
Pre- Reading (15 minutes) round  a round face (n) : mă ̣t tròn
* Pre-teach oval  an oval (n): mă ̣t trái xoan
- Ask Ss to name the full  full lips (n): môi dày
adjectives describing face and thin  thin lips (n) :môi mỏng
head. long  long hair (n) : tóc dài
- Listen to T carefully. short  short hair (n)tóc ngắn
-Write them on the board. * Matching (B5 P. 102)
Number one: He has an oval face and thin
* Matching (B5 P. 102) lips.
Listen and write the letters of Number two: He has a round face.
the pictures in your exercise Number three: She has a small face and
books. long hair.
T reads: Number four:Her hair isn’t long and isn’t
Ask Ss to present the answers short.
in front of the class. Answer key 1)a; 2) c; 3) b; 4) d;
Name the adjectives describing * Prediction (Gap fill) B4 P.101
head and face. Miss Chi is small tall and thin. She has a round
- Copy down - Comment. face short long black hair, brown eyes, a big small
* Prediction (Gap fill) B4 nose, full thin lips and small white teeth
P.101
Ask Ss to fill the information
in the table (guessing).
Listen and write the letters of a) It’s long.
the pictures in their exercise b) It’s black.
books. c) They are brown.
Ask Ss to give the guessing in d) It’s small.
front of the class. e) They are thin.
While- Reading (10 minutes)
- Read the text B4- P. 101

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Ask Ss to read the text in silent
and answer the questions in the Read the text in silent and answer the questions in
text.(a)-d)-P. 102) the text
Ask Ss to practice asking and My My My My
answering the questions in pair. partner mum dad brother/
Listen and correct mistakes and sister
gives the correct answers body thin
- Give the answers in front of face round
the class. hair short
- Listen and check the answers.
eyes etc
Post- Reading (10 minutes)
nose
Describle these people
Describe.
according to the table.
Example
Guess and fill in the table.
My father is thin.
- Call some Ss to report in front
He has short black hair and brown eyes
of the class.
- Report in front of the class
Give their guessing.
- Listen and remember.
- Listen and check their
guessing.
- Read the text in silent and
answer the questions in the text.
- Practice asking and answering
the questions in pair.
- Listen and write the correct
answers in their notebooks
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)
- Repeat the content of the
lesson.
4. Homework: (2 minutes)
- Describe your relatives (5
people).
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 10 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61: 18 / 1 / 2013
62: 16/ 1 / 2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY
Period 60. Lesson 1: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A1-A2)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feelings.Ask and answer
about other’s feelings..
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: hungry ,thirty ,tired ,full, cold, hot.
2.Grammar: How +do/does + S +feel .S+ feel +adj
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up : greeting
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and students activites Content
1. Warm up: (5 minutes) - Give the opposite meaning of the
Give the opposite meaning words: words.
- Introduce the content of the lesson: We 1) thin # (fat)
are going to learn about people’s feeling 2) short # (long)
and the way of asking and anwering about 3) big # (small)
feeling. 4) heavy # (light)
2. Presentation: 5) strong # (weak)
Introduction (10 minutes) 6) young # (old)
- Look at the pictures and match. 1.New words
* Matching: (through the pictures- P.
104)
(with answer key)
+ hungry l¹nh
+ thirsty nãng
+ full ®ãi
+ hot kh¸t
* Word- square: + cold mÖt
+ tired no
2.Word- square:
- Find and circle the words
( answer key)
 tall, hungry, hot, fat, full, tired, feel
 thirsty, no, cold, (old), short

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

T A L L G O
H U N G R Y - Listen and copy down the model
T H O T C S sentences in their notebooks.
R F A T O H
S F U L L O
3.Grammar:
T I R E D R
How +do/does + S +feel
Y F E E L T
S+ feel +adj
Use : Dùng để hỏi và trả lời về cảm
giác của mô ̣t người nào đó

Practice (15 minutes)


Present the model sentences.
* How do you feel? I am + feeling - Practice in pairs
they feel Example exchange:
* How does he feel? S1: How do you feel?
she S2: I’m [hungry].
He is + feeling.
She feels - Practice in front of the class.
* Words Cue Drill
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs asking - Look at the board.
about feeling, use - Practice in pairs.
the cues given below. Example Exchange
hungry thirsty hot How does she/he feel?
cold tired full She is /He is ......
- Call some pairs practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class.
class. * Answer:
* Picture Drill. Phuong- b
- Give Cued words A1- P. 104 a) – f) Nhan- a
- Ask Ss to practice asking and Ba- f
answering in pairs. Huong- d
Call some Ss to practice in front of the
class. - Listen and remember.
Further Practice (10 minutes) - Write assigments.
. A5. Listen and match the names with
the right pictures.

3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Recall the model sentences
4. Homework: (2 minutes)
- Learn the model of feelings by heart.
- Do exercises: 1, 2- P. 87 ( in
workbook)
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....
Duyê ̣t tuần 21 . Ngày 12 / 1 / 2013
TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến


Date of preparation : 17 /1 /2013 WEEK 22 Date of teaching 61 ,62: 21 / 1 / 2013
UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY
Period 61.Lesson 2: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A3-A4)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their demand and desire.Ask
and answer about other’s demand and desire.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: some orange juice ,some noodles ,want = would like,like
2.Grammar: Some + Uncountable nouns /Countable
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words and write the structure
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and students activities Content
1.Warm up: (5 minutes)
Make sentences with “How .... feel?”
1) Mai/ tired - Make sentences.
2) Nhi/ thirsty + Mai is tired.
3) You/ hungry + Nhi is thirsty.
4) Huy and Vinh/ hungry + You are hungry.
5) Lan’s mother/ cold + Huy and Vinh are hungry.
Introduce new lesson: We are going to + Lan’s mother is cold.
- Listen to T carefully.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

learn how to ask and answer about
people’s demand and desire by using
the structures: What would you like?
Or: Would you like?
2. New lesson: (15 minutes) * Pre-teach
* Pre-teach 1.New wordsPresent the new words:
Read the new words as model and ask + some orange juice (n): nước hoa quả
Ss to repeat in chorus. + some noodles (n) : mì
*Note: Some + Uncountable nouns. + (to) want = would like (v): muốn
Countable + (to) like (v): thích
2.Predict Dialogue
* Predict Dialogue Nam: How do you feel?
Read the text A3- P. 105. Lan: I’m ...... and ........
Ask Ss to read the text in silent and Nam: What would you like?
match the names of the people with the Lan: I would like some ...What about you?
adjectives below: Nam: I’m ... I’d like some ...
Lan Nam Ba Answer key
hot hot Lan: hot, thirsty, a drink/ orange juice
thirsty Nam: hungry, noodles
tired Ba: tired, to sit down
full - Report in front of the class
hungry - Practice in pair.
noodles Example Exchange
a drink S1: How do you feel?
Call some Ss to report in front of the S2: I’m [cold and hungry]
class. S1: What would you like?
Ask Ss to practice asking and S2: I’d like some [noodles].
answering with the following cues: - Practice in front of the class
Call some Ss to practice in front of the - Do as T’s directions.
class. Example exchange:
A4. Ask and answer about Nam, Lan S1: How does Nam feel?
and Ba. (10 minutes) S2: He is hungry.
Ask Ss to use the above information S1: What would he like?
to ask and answer about the three S2: He’d like noodles.
people’s feeling, demand and desire.
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)
Recall the model sentences
4. Homework: (2 minutes)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Learn the model of demanding and
new words by heart.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 17 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61: 23 / 1 / 2013
62: 22/ 1 / 2013
UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY
Period 62. Lesson 3: HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A5-A6)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about other’s demand and
desire.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: some orange juice ,some noodles ,want = would like,like
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and students activities Content
1.Warm up: (5 minutes)
2. New lesson: (15 minutes) * Pre-teach
* Pre-teach 1.New words:Review the new words:
Read the new words as model and ask + some orange juice (n): nước uống hoa
Ss to repeat in chorus. quả
*Note: Some + Uncountable nouns. + some noodles (n) : mì
Countable + (to) want = would like (v): muốn
* Predict Dialogue + (to) like (v): thích
6. Listen and repeat. Then practice the 2.Predict Dialogue Nam: How do you
dialogue with a partner. (10 minutes) feel?
Present the model sentence: - Practice in front of the class
What’s the matter with ....? - Do as T’s directions.
= What’s wrong with...? Example exchange:
Ask Ss to practice reading the S1: How does Nam feel?
S2: He is hungry.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

dialogue in pairs in front of the class. S1: What would he like?
Ask Ss to use these words and make a S2: He’d like noodles.
new dialogue with a partner. .
a) hot/ cold drink - Make dialogue with a partner:
b) hungry/ noodles Example Exchange:
c) thirsty/ drink a) A: What’s the matter, B?
Call some pairs to practice in front of B: I’m hot.
the class. A: What do you want?
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) B: I want a cold drink.
Recall the model sentences
4. Homework: (2 minutes)
- Learn the model of demanding and
new words by heart.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 17 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61: 25 / 1 / 2013
62: 23/ 1 / 2013
UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY
Period 63. Lesson 4: FOOD AND DRINK (B1, B2, B3)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know names of some foods and drinks.
And use “some” or “any” fluently
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: an apple , an orange ,a banana,some water
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and students activities Content
1. Warm up: (5 minutes) - Make questions.
Make questions with “What would... like?” Answer key:
1) I want some orange juice. 1) What would you like?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2) They’d like some water. 2) What would they like?
3) He wants some cold drink. 3) What would he like?
4) My mother’d like noodles. 4)What would your mother like?
In our lesson we will learn some kinds of - Listen to T.
food and drink.
2. Presentation:Introduction (15 minutes) 1.New words
- Listen and write the new words. Present new words.
an apple (n) :quả táo
- Read the new words and ask Ss to an orange (n): quả cam
repeat. a banana(n) :quả chuối
* Notes: The usage of “some”, “a”, “an” some water (n) : nước
- some + uncountable nouns
countable nouns
a + one countable noun beginning with a
consonant.
an + one countable noun beginning with a
vowel. 2.Dictation list: a, an, some
* Dictation list: a, an, some - Read:
Listen and repeat. Rice, water, banana, milk, vegetables,
Take notes. apple, meat, orange, noodles, hot drink,
bread, orange juice, cold drink
3. Presentation Dialogue
Practice (10 minutes) Present the model sentences:
* Presentation Dialogue (B- 2 P. 109) (+) There is some rice.
Read the dialogue between Phuong and (?) Is there any rice?
Thu. (-) Thereisn’t any rice.
- Ask Ss to read the text in silent then tick (+) There are some apples.
( ) before names of food for lunch in the (?) Are there any apples?
following list: (-) There aren’t any apples.
meat ( ) fruit ( ) - Listen and divide.
rice ( ) water ( ) a an some
noodles milk banana an rice, water,
Further- Practice (10 minutes) hot apple milk,
- Ask and answer the food and drink that drink an vegetable,
your partner wants. cold orange noodles,
- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering drink bread,
about the pictures B1- P. 109 as the meat,orange
examples: juice

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Is there any ....? Yes. There is some.... Practice in pairs.
No. There isn’t any..... Example Exchange
Are there any....? Yes. There are some.... S1: What would you like?
No. There are not any... S2: I’d like [an apple].
- Ask Ss to practice in front of the class. What would you like?
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes) S1: I’d like [some milk].
- Recall the usage of “some, any”. - Practice in pairs.

4. Homework: (2 minute)
Learn the new words by heart.
Do exercise: Write true sentences about
your kitchen, using “there is/ thereisn’t
any....” And “There are/ There aren’t any....”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.....

Duyê ̣t tuần 22 . Ngày 18 / 1 / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : 24 /1 /2013 WEEK 23 Date of teaching 61 ,62: 28 / 1 / 2013


UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY
Period 64. Lesson 5: FOOD AND DRINK (B4, B5)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use nouns and tell what they would like.
Help students use uncountable and plural nouns, Polite requests “ I’d like some ……..” and
polite offers “ What would you like ?”
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: chicken ,rice ,a fish ,bread ,meat ,vegetables ,milk ,fruit
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Test 15 minutes
3.New lesson
Teacher’s and student activities Content
1. Warm up: (5 minutes) Networks:
Introduce new lesson: In our today
lesson, we will learn some kinds of food Food Drink
and drink.
- List the words. 1.New word
2. Presentation: (10 minutes) chicken (n) : thòt gaø.
- Present new words rice (n) : côm, gaïo.
Read the new words and ask Ss to repeat a fish : caù.
after T. bread (n) : baùnh mì.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

meat (n) : thòt.
- Listen and write the new words in their vegetables (n) : rau caûi.
notebooks. milk (n) : söõa.
fruit (n) : traùi caây.
* Rub out and remember

* Rub out and remember


- Ask Ss to practice guessing the names 2.Matching
of food or drink in picture B5. Example Exchange
Practice (5 minutes) S1: What is in [a]?
Tell Ss to match the names of people in S2: Some meat.
B5 with the things they would like.
T reads :Nhan would like some chicken
and some rice.
+ Tuan would like some meat and some Listen and match.
vegetables. Nhan: c, f Tuan: a, d
Huong ‘d like some fruit and some milk. Huong: e, g Mai: b, h
+ Mai ’ d like some fish and an orange
juice.
Ask Ss to compare the answers with a
partner. 3.Grammar:
Ask Ss to give the answers in front of the I would like some chicken/rice/orange
class juice.
Present the dialogue B4- P.110. vegetables.
Presents the model sentence: 4.Practice
- Listen and write in their notebooks. - Practice in pairs.
Further- Practice (5 minutes) Example Exchange:
Ask Ss to use the menu in B4 and the S1: What would you like?
pictures a) - f) in B5, asking and S2: I’d like some [fish].
answering about food and drink that they
like. - Listen and remember.
Call some Ss to practice in front of the
class. - Write assignment.
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)
Recall the model:What would you like
4. Homework: (2 minutes)
Do exercises: 3, 4- P. 90 (in workbook)
Test 15 minutes

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

I. Odd one out ( Chọn từ không cùng nhóm với từ còn lại)
1. A. apple B. orange C. juice D. banana
2. A. milk B. meat C. tea D. coffee
3. A. carrot B. tomato C. lettuce D. chicken
4. A. want B. thirsty C. cold D. hot
II. Rearrange the following words to make complete sentences (Sắp xếp từ cho sẵn để
hoàn thành câu)
1. color/ what/ eyes/ your/ are? 2. coffee/ would/ I/ some/ like.
3. isn’t/ short/ hair/ his.
Answer keys and points:I. 4Ps => 1P for each. II. 6Ps => 2Ps for each.
1. C 1. What color are your eyes?
2. B 2. I would like some coffee.
3. D 3. His hair isn’t short.
4. A
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
.....
---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 24 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61: 30 / 1 / 2013
62: 29/ 1 / 2013
UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY
Period 65 Lesson 6: MY FAVORITE FOOD(C1 - 4)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to speak about their favorite food to contrast
“Would you like…… ?” with “Do you like….?”.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: a carrot ,a bean,a tomato,lectuce ,a potato,a pea,a cabbage,an onion
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s & student activities Content
1. Warm up: (5 minutes) - Do exercise on the board.
Fill in the blanks with a, an, some or any: Answer key:
1) There is not ... milk in the jar. 1) any

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2) No. There are not ... noodles. 2) any
3) I have ... orange. 3) an
4) Do you have ... meat? 4) any
5) I am hungry. I would like ... chicken. 5) some
- Introduce new lesson: In this lesson we - Listen to T.
will learn some kinds of vegetables and
the questions about people’s hobby. 1.Vocabulary:
2. Presentation:(15 minutes) a carrot (n) : cuû caø roát.
- Present new words: a bean (n): haït ñaäu .
Read the new words and ask Ss to repeat a tomato (n): quaû caø chua.
after T. lettuce (n) (n): rau xaø laùch.
Listen and write the new words in their a potato (n): cuû khoai taây.
notebooks. a pea(n) : ñaäu haït troøn.
- Listen and repeat. a cabbage(n) : baép caûi.
Call some Ss to read the words again an onion(n) : cuû haønh.
individually. 2.Picture Drill (C1- P. 112)
* Picture Drill (C1- P. 112) - Practice in pairs.
- Ask Ss to practice asking and Example Exchange
answering names of food and drink in C1. S1: What are these?
Call some pairs to practice in front of the S2: They are beans.
class. What are these?
Read the dialogue between Nhan and S1: They are carrots.
Mai.
Tell Ss to practice reading the dialogue in
pairs. + Do you like vegetables?
* Rub out and remember dialogue Yes, I do.
- Present model sentences: No, I don’t.
Practice in front of the class. + Would you like some vegetable?
- Listen to T. Yes, please. / Yes, I would.
- Practice reading the dialogue in pairs. No, thank you. / No, I would not.
- Do as T’s directions.
- Listen and write the model sentences in - Present new words:
their notebooks + lemonade + apple juice + soda
Practice (10 minutes) + iced tea
Read the new words and ask Ss to coffee
repeat after T.
- Listen and write the new words in their 3. Picture Drill (C3 P. 112)
notebooks. Example Exchange

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

* Picture Drill (C3 P. 112) S1: What is it?
- Tell Ss to practice asking and S2: It is lemonade.
answering names of drink in C3. S1: Do you like it?
Call some pairs to practice in front of the S2: Yes, I do. / No, I do not.
class. - Practice reading the dialogue in pairs.
- Read the dialogue in A 4. - Practice in front of the class.
Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in - Do as T’s directions.
pairs. - Repeat in front of the class.
* Rub out and remember the structures: + Do you like vegetables?Yes, I do.
- Ask Ss to repeat model sentences No, I don’t.
Call some pairs to practice in front of the + Would you like some vegetables?
class. Yes, please. / Yes, I would.
Further- Production (10 minutes) No, thank you. / No, I would not.
Tell Ss to ask thier friends then fill in the Example:S1: Do you like [chicken]?
Call some Ss to report in front of the class. S2: Yes, I do. / No, I do not.
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)
Repeat the content of the lesson.
4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Write assignments.
Learn by heart and distinguish two
structures:
“Would you like ...?” and “Do you
like ...?”
- Do exercises: 1, 2, 3- P. 91(in
workbook)
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.......... ---------------------------------  ------------------------------
Date of preparation : 24 /1 /2013 Date of teaching 61: 1 / 2 / 2013
62: 30/ 1 / 2013
UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?
Period 66. Lesson 1: AT THE STORE (A1)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to use quantifies and containes to talk about things people
buy at the store
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: an egg , cooking oil ,beef ,tooth past ,a chocolate
2.Grammar:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s& Student activities Content
1. Warm up: (5 minutes) - Make questions:
Make questions:1) I want some water. Answer key:
2) They like some tea. 1) What do you want?
3) She feels tired. 2) What do they like?
4) Lan would like orange juice. 3) What does she feel?
- Introduce new lesson: we will learn 4) What would Lan like?
bout weight and quantity in this lesson. - Listen to T.
2. Presentation: (15 minutes)
- Present new words: 1.New words
Read the new words and ask Ss to repeat an egg (n): tröùng.
in chorus. cooking oil (n): daàu aên.
- Listen and write the new words in their beef (n) : thòt boø .
notebooks tooth past (n) : kem ñaùnh raêng.
* Slap the board a chocolate(n) : soâ coâ la
S«-c«-la DÇu
la ¨n ThÞt

Qu¶ trøng
Kem ®¸nh r¨ng

Practice (10 minutes) 2.Example Exchange


- Read the dialogue first as model. S1: Can I help you?
Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in S2: Yes, A bottle of cooking oil, please.
pairs. S1: Here you are.
Call some pairs to practice reading the S2: Thank you.
dialogue in front of the class.
Further Practice: (10 minutes) Repeat: I would like a bottle of [water],
Ask Ss to use the pictures in A1- b to [oil], please.
practice making the dialogues like the one I’d like a bar of soap, please.
in A1a.
- Tell Ss to work in pairs.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Call some pairs practice aloud the 3.* Substitution Drill
completed dialogue.
3. Consolidation: (3 minutes)
* Substitution Drill
Water, oil, soap, peas, beans, coke,
toothpaste, oranges, eggs, tea, and noodles. - Write assignments.
4. Homework: (2 minutes
- Learn the new words by heart.
- Do exercise 1- P. 95 (in workbook)
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
Duyê ̣t tuần 23. Ngày 25 / 1 / 2013
TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /2 /2013 WEEK 24 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. / 2 / 2013


UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?
Period 67. Lesson 2: AT THE STORE (A2)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to talk about their demand ,desire and know how to talk
about the quantity, weight and price.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: to need ,How much / How many, can I hepl you, half, a cookie
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and Students’activities Contents
1.Warm up: Bingo - beef - bottle
- Put the table on the board. - egg - tea
-Ask students to choose any five words - dozen - water
and copy them into their books. - oil - gram

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Let students listen to the cassette and
correct.
2 .Pre listening: Vocabulary: 1.Vocabulary:
- Listen to the teacher. to need (v) : cần.
- Repeat after the teacher. How much / How many : bao nhiêu.
- Notice the main stress pattern. Can I hepl you?:Tôi có thể giúp gì cho
- Write the new words in their notebooks bạn ?
* Checking vocabulary:ROR Half (a kilo) : 1/2
Predict dialogueA2, page 112 a cookie (n): banh qui gai
- Set the scene: + Where is Ba? 2.Predict dialogueA2, page 112
+ What does he want? Salesgirl: Can I hepl you?
+ How much / many ……? Ba: Yes, I’d like some (1) ___ , please.
- Put the dialogue on the board. Some of Salesgirl: How much do you want?
the words are missing. Ba: (2) ______ grams , please.
- Ask students to guess what the missing Salesgirl: Is there any things else ?
words are.
Listen to the teacher. Ba: Yes, I need some (3)___ .
-Answer the teacher’s questoins. Salesgirl: How many do you want?
- Read the dialogue. Ba: (4) ______ , please.
3. While listening:
- Get students to listen to the tape 2 3.Comprehension question A3 on p 117
times . 1. beef 2. 200 3. eggs 4. a dozen
- Correct their prediction. a. At the store d. a dozen
- Ask students to listen the tape again, b. beef c. 200
then answer the questions. + Phuong - a tube of toothpaste.
Listen to the cassette and find out things + Ly - a bar of soap anda box of
that people want to buy chocolates
4. Post listening: + Mai - a can of soda
- Let students read the dialogue then + Nam – a packet of cookies
make a shopping list and hve students How much/How
Things
read by themselves then do the exercises many
as quick as possible Cooking - a bottle
Read the dialogue. oil - 2 kilo
- Make a shopping list. - Rice - half a kilo
- Write the dialogue in the notebooks - Beef - half a dozen
5.Homework: - Oranges
Vocabulary .
Have them prepare Unit 11 – L 3 :(A3-

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

4):How much / many.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
.......... ---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /2 /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / 2 / 2013
62: …./ 2 / 2013
UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?
Period 68. Lesson 2: AT THE STORE (A3,4)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to continue talking about their demand and know how to
talk about the quantity, weight and price.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and Students’activities Content
1.Warm up: Answer key:
Put these words into two groups: “How How much How many
much” and “How many” meat, milk, oil, oranges,
Oranges, meat, oil, bread, carrots, bread, beff, bananas, eggs,
chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, soap chicken, rice, carrots,
2 .Pre listening: soap chocolates,
A3. Listen. Match the names of the apples
people with the things they want. A3. Listen. Match the names of the people
- Listen to the teacher. with the things they want. (15 minutes)
- Tape transcript: Phuong- d
+ Phuong wants a tube of toothpaste. Ly- e, a
+ Ly wants a bar of soap and a box of Mai- b
chocolates. Nam- c
+ Mai wants a can of soda.
+ Nam wants a packet of cookies.
4.Read. Then write the shopping list in

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

your exercise book. (10 minutes)
- Introduce the situation: Nam’s mother 300 g – beef 1 kg – rice
wants Nam to buy 4 things at the store. 500 g – beans 6 apples
Guess 4 things she needs. 1 dozen eggs 2 bottles of milk
- Read the dialogue first as model. 3 packets of noodles
3. While listening:
- Get students to listen to the tape 2
times . Example Exchange:
- Correct their prediction. S1: I need some [beef].
- Ask students to listen the tape again, S2: How much do you want?
then answer the questions. S1: [Three hundred grams],please.
Listen to the cassette and find out things S1: I need some {apples}.
that people want to buy S2: How many do you want?
4. Consolidation: (3 minutes) S1: {Six} please
- Repeat structures through Remember.
5. Homework: (2 minutes)
Make 5 sentences with the questions:
“How much”, “How many”.
Do exercises: 3, 4, 5- P.94(in
workbook).
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /2 /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / 2 / 2013
62: …./ 2 / 2013
UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?
Period 69. Lesson 4: AT THE CANTEEN (B1,3,4)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to practice offers and requests for food and drink, using “
a, an and some”.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and Students’activities Content
1.Warm up: Kim’s game rice noodl beef
Have students look at the picture of es
food / drink in B1 on page119 and try chicken fish vegetables
to remember as many words as oranges bana orange juice
possible. nas
milk soda water
2 .Presentation:Show students the 1. Presentation pictures: B3 on page 119
picture model sentences:
- Say the model sentences:
+ What would you like for breakfast? - What would you like for breakfast?
+ I’d like some milk. - I’d like some milk and a banana.
+ What would you like for lunch? - What would you like for lunch?
+ I’d like some rice , fish and a I’d like some meat,vegetables
banana and an orange.
Students read the dialogue in A2 on - Bạn dùng gì cho bữa ăn ……………?.
page 116 again . - Tôi muốn ……………………….
Make the questions to isolate the What would you like for + N(meal)?
model sentence: I’d like some / a / an…………
How much beef do you want?
-How many eggs do you want? 2.Picture drill
3. Practice: - rice - soda
- Hold up the first picture and say the - noodles - meat
model sentences: - bananas - fish
+What would you like for lunch? - milk vegetables
+I’d like some meat, rice and 3.Survey
vegetables. What would you like
4.Further practice: for?
Get students to fill in their real names bre lun dinn
and what time they do the following Name
ak- ch er
things. fas
- Get them to practice in pairs: t
+ What would you like for …? mil … …… Lan……
+ I ‘d like some / a / an ………. k, … …… …………
5. Homework: (2 minutes) bre … …… …

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Ask students to learn vocabulary and ad … …… …………
offers / requests for food and drink. … … …… …………
Have them prepare Unit 11-L5 : … … …
(B2,5):Talking about prices of food … …
and drink with “How much…?” … …
… …
… …

E.Give experience.....................................................................................................................
………………………………………………………………………………………………

Duyê ̣t tuần 24 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013
TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /2 /2013 WEEK 25 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. / 2 / 2013


UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?
Period70. Lesson 5: AT THE CANTEEN (B2,5)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students might use “ How much …………… “ to talk about prices for food and
drink.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and Students’activities Contents
1. Presentation: 1.Vocabulary:
- Listen to the teacher. Fifty : 50.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Repeat after the teacher. a hundred (Two hundred) : 100 (200)
- Notice the main stress pattern. a thousand(Two thousand): 1000 / 2000
- Write the new words in their - seven thousand five hundred : 7.500. A3.
notebooks
.+ Checking vocabulary: Slap the
board
- Put the numbers on the board.
- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.
- Call out one of numbers in English in 2.Target language:
loud voice. How much is / It’s /
2. Presentation text are…? they’re
- Ask students to read a menu - a fried rice 2,500ñ
in A5 on page 120 then anwer some - a bowl of noodles 3,000ñ
questions about prices to isolate the - a sandwich 1,500ñ
model sentence: - a cake 500ñ
+ How much is a fried rice? - an orange juice 1,800ñ
+ How much is a cake? - a lemon juice 1,000ñ
+ How much is a sandwich? - an ice-cream 2,000ñ
Let students copy the notes in their - How much + be + S ?
notebooks and memorize - It / they + be + price
Answer the questions about prices to - Giá bao nhiêu?
isolate the model sentence: - Hỏi và trả lời về giá cả.
+ It’s 2,500 ñ.
+ It’s 500 ñ.
+ It’s 1,500 ñ. How much is / It’s /
- Copy the notes in the notebooks and are…? they’re
memorize. - a fried rice 2,500ñ
3. Practice: - a bowl of noodles 3,000ñ
Read the shopping list. - a sandwich 1,500ñ
Read the phrazes. - a cake 500ñ
Repeat after the teacher (The fisrt cue
- an orange juice 1,800ñ
then the second cue).
- a lemon juice 1,000ñ
Make the sentences for themselves.
- an ice-cream 2,000ñ
Nought and crosses
+How much is it / are they?
+It is 500ñ.
4.Further practice:
+ They are 10,000ñ.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2,500ñ 500ñ 3,000ñ - Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams. One is noughts
4,800ñ 10,000ñ 1,000ñ (O) and the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
1,200ñ 8,500ñ 5,000ñ and ask questions about prices .
- The team which has three noughts or three
Look at the board.
crosses on a line will win the game.
- Work in groups.
One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).
- Choose any words in the boxes, ask
and ask questions about prices :
5.Homework:
Food and drink.
How much is it / are they ?
It is / They are ...................
Exercises in the exercise book from
page 43 to 46.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /2 /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / 2 / 2013
62: …./ 2 / 2013
UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?
Period71. Lesson 6: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to produce language better by practice in like and dislike,
countabilitiy, adjectives, question words, present progressive, simple present and
quantifiers
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary : review
2.Grammar : review
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and Students’activities Content
1.Present simple tense: Like 1.Present simple tense: Like
Dialogue build. a) - Do you …………… noodles?
- Read the dialogue and write few key - Yes, I ……………… noodles.
words on the board to help students - ……………… you……………. rice?
remember what the two speaker in the - No………. …………. ………… rice.
dialogue say to each other . b) ……… she………….. chicken?
- Get students to write in the missing - Yes. She …………chicken.
words on the board. -…………… she ………….. fish?
- Ask students to write the missing - No. She ......... …………… fish.
words on the board
2.A / an / some / any: 2.A / an / some / any:
.1. any 2. any 3. some 4. some 5. any 3 5 8
6. some 7. any 8. some 9. a
Nought and crosses 1 6 2
- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams. One is noughts 7 4 9
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).
Look at the board. +Do you have any bananas?
- Work in groups. +No, I don’t have any bana..
- One is noughts (O) and the other is , but I have some oranges
Crosses (X).
- Choose any words in the boxes, ask
and ask questions about feelings : 3.Adjective
3.Adjective 1.tall 2.short
Pelmanism. 3.thin 4.fat
- Stick 10 cards on the board so that the 4.weak 5.strong
students can only see the numbers, make 6.hot 7.cold
sure the words are mixed up.
- Divide the slass into two teams and ask
students 4.Question words:
4.Question words: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Lucky numbers 8
- Write the numbers on the board. 1 Lucky number. 7 - a Who
- Divide class into teams. The teams 2 - b What 8 - e Where
take turn to choose the numbers. 3 - d What
- Tell students that they have to answer 4 Lucky number.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

the questions .
5 - c How
6 Lucky number.
5.Present simple and present progressive
5.Present simple and present tense: - S + Vs / es ………(every day)
progressive tense: - S + is / am / are + Ving…(now)
a) is eating d) is going
Transformation drill b) are drinking e) is getting
- Ask students to remind Present simple is riding f) is traveling
and present progressive tense.
- Ask students to have to turn into a
new sentences using present progressive - Review vocabulary and Grammar points
tense (Unit9 – Unit11) and exercises in the
3.Homework: exercise book from Unit 9 to Unit 11 .
Vocabulary and Grammar points (Unit9 - Prepare FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST.
– Unit11).
Exercises in the exercise book from Unit
9 to Unit 11.
Have them prepare FORTY-FIVE
MINUTE TEST .
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /2 /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / 2 / 2013
62: …./ 2 / 2013
Period 72: ENGLISH TEST No3
A/ Aim: Helping students to review grammar points and vocabulary from Unit
B/ Language Focus:
C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.
D/ Procedure
1. Từ vựng:Chọn từ gạch chân có phát âm khác với từ còn lại
2. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ: Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu, nối câu hỏi ở cột A với câu
trả lời ở cột B
3. Đọc hiểu: Đọc đoạn văn về Quang
4. Viết: Viết câu theo chỉ dẫn.
B. Ma trâ ̣n

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Tổn
Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng
Chủ đề g
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Phonetic
&Pronuciatio 4 4
n (1,0) (1,0)
L.Focus 8 8 16
(2,0) (2,0) (4,5)
Reading 5 5
(2,5) (2,5)
Writing 4 4
(2,0) (2,0)
29
Tổng 16 (4,5) 10 (3,5) 5 (2,5)
(10)

ĐỀ I
I.Khoanh tròn chữ cái trước từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn lại.
(1,0 điểm)
1. A. sandwich B. fat C. gram D. glass
2. A. hot B. dozen C. box D. bottle
3. A. head B. tea C. bean D. cream
4. A. light B. bike C. rice D. lips
II.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0
điểm)
1. She is not strong. She is.........................
A .weak B thin C. strong D. fat
2. I'd like .....................orange.
A. an B. a C. some. D. any
3. There is not..................meat in the kitchen.
A. an B. some C. a D. any
4 She is hungry. She'd like some………..
A. fish B. noodles C. orange D. hot drink.
5. ………. does Lan feel? – She’s hot.
A. Who B. What C. Where D. How
6 She ......................a short yellow hair.
A. have B. is C. has D. having
7. There are ten .............. in the body .
A. hands B. shoulders C. legs D. fingers

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

8. There is…………..vegetables in the kitchen.
A. some B. an C. a D. any
III. Nối một câu hỏi ở cột A với một câu trả lời thích hợp ở cột B: (2 điểm)
1 What is your favorite food? a. It is green.
2. How do you feel? b. No, I don't. I like iced coffee.
3. What would you like for breakfast? c. I like chicken and oranges.
4. Can I help you? d. Yes, she is.
5. How much is it? e. We 'd like some bread and some milk.
6. What color is it? f. I am tired.
7. Do you like iced tea ? g. It is 10,300d
8. Is she thirsty ? h. Yes. I'd like a bottle of cooking oil.
1…. 2…… 3 …… 4…… 5……6……. 7……. 8………
IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (3,0 điểm)
Quang is a gymnast. He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. His eyes are brown. He
has a round face and thin lips. Quang often has dinner at home. He likes fish. He often has
fish, meat and vegetables for dinner. After dinner he eats apples and drinks a glass orange
juice. He feels full after dinner.
a.Chọn T (True) cho câu đúng và F (False) cho câu sai. ( 1,0 đ )
…………….. Quang has brown eyes.
…………….. His lips are full.
…………….. His favorite food is fish.
……………...He drinks apple juice after dinner.
b.Hãy trả lời các câu hỏi sau. ( 2,0 đ )
1. What does Quang do ?
………………………………………………………………………………………………

2.Is his hair short or long?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…..
3.What does he often have for dinner?
………………………………………………………………………………………………

4.Does he eat any fruit after dinner?
……………………………………………………………….
……………………………………
V.Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn (2.0 điểm)
1. . cup / like / tea / of / you / would / a? (Sắp xếp câu cho đúng)
→…………………………………………. …………………………………………………

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2.
→…………………………………………………………………………………………….
Lan want a kilo rice (Đặt câu hỏi)
3.I/ would/ a bottle / cook/ oil/ please.(Hoàn chỉnh câu)

………………………………………………………………………………………………
4.How do she feel (Tìm lỗi sai và sửa đúng)

………………………………………………………………………………………………..
ANSWERS
ĐỀ I
I . Khoanh tròn chữ cái trước từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn
lại(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 .D 2.B 3. A 4. D
II. Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A B B D C D A

III. Nối một câu hỏi ở cột A với một câu trả lời thích hợp ở cột B(mỗi câu đúng 0,25
điểm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C F E H G A B D
IV . Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi
a.Chọn T (True) cho câu đúng và F (False) cho câu sai(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1.T 2.F 3T 4.F
b. Hãy trả lời các câu hỏi sau(mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
1 . Quang is a gymnast
2. His hair is short
3. He often has fish, meat and vegetables for dinner
4. No .He doesn’t
V. .Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn (mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
1.Would you like a cup of tea ?
2 . What does Lan want ?
3. I would like a bottle of cooking oil .
4 . do → does
ĐỀ II
I . Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi
a.Chọn T (True) cho câu đúng và F (False) cho câu sai(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1.F 2.F 3T 4.T
b. Hãy trả lời các câu hỏi sau(mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
1 . Quang is a gymnast
2. His hair is short
3. He often has fish, meat and vegetables for dinner
4. No .He doesn’t
II. một câu hỏi ở cột A với một câu trả lời thích hợp ở cột B(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B E D A H G F C
III. Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B D A D C A A C
IV. .Viết lại câu theo chỉ dẫn (mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
1. do → does
2 . Would you like a cup of tea ?
3. What does Lan want ?
4 . I would like a bottle of cooking oil .
IV . Khoanh tròn chữ cái trước từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn
lại(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 .B 2.C 3. B 4. D
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 25 . Ngày ……. / ………. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 26 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Period 73 TEST CORRECTION.
A . Teaching aims
By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to know what they did in the test.Therefore they
get more experience to study better.
B.Teaching aids: board,cards,…..
D.Procedures:
T calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes, from big to small mistakes
- T asks Ss what they did in the test.What they did well and what they didn’t do
well.What they did but they didn’t know they are true or false.
- Calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes ,from big to small mistakes.
Question I:
- All of Ss know how to pronounce so they choose right,However some student’s choose
not right.
Eg: incorrect : ->correct:
Question II:
- There are many Ss choose exactly.
Eg: - Besides, there are some week Ss didn’t know how to choose right answers ,choose
many answer in the sentence.
Question III:
All of Ss know how to answer,so they did very well
Question IV:
There are some Ss know how to answer question paragraph,so they write very well.
Eg:
- Although,there are some Ss didn’t know how to rewrite these sentences so they didn’t
write true.
Eg: incorrect: ->correct : yes ,she did.
Question V:
-All of Ss write the sentence very well
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /2 /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. /
……/2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

62: …./ ……./2013
UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES
Period 74. Lesson 1: WHAT ARE THEY DOING? (A1,2,3,4,5)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students might express what people are doing fluently and practice in present
progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :

Teacher’s activities
Students’ activities
1. Revision:
_ _ _ _ _ _ (sports) - Students take turn to guess the letters
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (pastimes of the words.
Hangman - Give a letter in the alphabet.
- Draw strokes on the board. Each stroke - Have to try to guess the word.
stands for a letter of the word. - Find out the word.
- The teacher draws a stroke if a student’s
guess is not right.
- The teacher gives the answer if they lose.

2 .Presentation: - Listen and look at the pictures shown


- to swim (v): bôi, loäi by the teacher.
- to play badminton : chôi caàu loâng - Try to say the names of activities
- to jog : ñi boä theå duïc shown.
- to do aerobics : taäp theå duïc nhòp ñieäu - Write the new words in their
- to play table tennis : chôi boùng baøn notebooks.
- to skip : nhaûy daây
Elicit vocabulary
- Use pictures to introduce new words .
- Have some students say the names of
activities the teacher show.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

* Checking vocabulary: - Students repeat chorally and
Rub out and remember remember all the English words.
-Point to the Vietnamese translations and - Call the English words and write the
rub out English words. English words if there is time.
- Get students to call the English words.
2 .Presentation:
- He is swimmimg. - Students remind the tenses : present
- They are playing badminton. simple and present progressive.
- She is skipping.
- Try to help students to review the tenses :
present simple and present progressive.
3. Practice: - Look at the cues.
- He / swim - Listen to the teacher.
- She / do aerobics - Repeat it chorally and then
- They / play tennis individually.
- They / play soccer - Make the sentence for themselves.
- He / jog - Practice in pairs.
- She / skip - Some pairs practice in front.
Word cue drill
- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.
- What is he doing?
- He is swimming.
- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes.
4.Further practice:
- Look at the board.
Picture Pictu Pictu
- Work in groups.
i re a re b
- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Picture Pictu Pictu Crosses (X).
g re h re c - Choose any words in the boxes, ask
Picture Pictu Pictu and ask questions about prices :
f re e red +Picture c
+What are they doing?
+ They are playing soccer.
-5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Sports vocabulary. - Do as the teacher suggests.
- Present progressive tense.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Have them prepare Unit 12 - L 2 :(A3-
5):Reading a text and practising “Which”
question.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Period 75. Lesson 2 : FREE TIME (B1-3)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students might wirte short texts better and Writing short texts
about what we do in our free time
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up: - Students look at the picture and choose
- swim one of the activities the teacher shows .
- go joging - The rest of the class asks him or her
- play volleyball question to find which activity he or she
-doaerobics chooses.
- skip Guessing game. * Do you go joging in your free time?
- Show them the picture. Ask them to * Yes, I do / No, I don’t.
choose one of activities.
- Get the rest of the class to guess which
activity they choose. The first student
guesses the house correctly comes up to
the front, chooses a new house and the

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

game continues.
2 .Pre - writing:
* Vocabulary: - Listen to the teacher.
Free time : thôøi gian raõnh. - Guess which sports they do.
to go fishing : ñi caâu caù.
to go to the movies : ñi xem phim.
Open prediction
- Introduce the two chracters Lan and Nam,
ask students to predict which sports Lan
and Nam do.
* Checking vocabulary:Rub out and - Students repeat chorally and remember
remember all the English words.
-Point to the Vietnamese translations and - Call the English words and write the
rub out English words. English words if there is time.
- Get students to call the English words.
3 .While writing:
B1 on page 127
a) Phuong goes to the movies in his … - Students read the text and check their
b) Ly watches TV. predictions.
c) Nam reads in his free time.
d) Lan listens to music.
e) Tuan goes fishing. Read the text again and answer the
f) Long plays video games questions below.
Ask students to read the text about Lan and - Write the questions and answers in the
Nam. notebook.
- Ask students to read then answer the
questions below.Check whether their
answer are right or wrong.
4.Post reading:
-San writes: I watch TV, go fishing… - Work in groups.
-Thuy writes: I watch TV,go to the park - Each student write three things about
Group writing: San, Thuy and Chinh they do in their free time.
watch TV. San and Chinh play football. - Read aoud.
San goes fishing. Thuy goes to thepark and
play badminton…………
Pyramid
- Ask students to work in groups. Each
student writes three things about they do in

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

their free time.
- Let each group read “ Group writng”
aloud.
- Feedback.
-5.Homework - Take notes and memorize
Unit 12: Sports And Pastimes – FREE - Do as the teacher requests.
TIME - Lesson 4 : (B4-5) Ask students to
learn by heart sports vocabulary and
Simple present tense.
Have them prepare Unit 12 - Lesson 4:
(B4-5) : “How often” questions and
answers……
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 26 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 27 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Period 76. Lesson 3: FREE TIME (B4-5)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ How often..?”. “ 0nce, twice, three
times ………… a week” to talk about frequency activities .
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1.Revision: B4 on page 128
- Tan -f - Answer theteacher’s questions.
- Minh and Nam -e - Repeat after the teacher.
- Lien -a - Match the names with the right
- Lan and Mai -b pictures.
Matching
Set the sence: What do you do in your free
time?Now listen to the tape about What Tan/
Minh and Nam/ Lien /Lan and Mai do in
their free time.
- Run through the pictures.
- Get students to match the names with the
right pictures.
2 .Presentation: +Vocabulary:
- Once (adv) : một lần. - Listen to the teacher.
- Twice (adv) : hai lần - Repeat after the teacher.
- Three times: ba lần - Notice the main stress pattern.
- a weeek : một tuần - Write the new words in their notebooks.
- How often …… : thường như thế
+ Checking vocabulary: What and
where - Students repeat chorally and remember
a week all the words.
three times - Go to the board and fill in the circles

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

with the right words.
once
how often
twice
- Elicit the vocabulary from the students and
write them in the circles.
- Get students to repeat the words including
the rubbed out words by pointing at the
empty cir
+ Target language: Ordering
- She goes joging. - Students read the statements.
- How often does she listen to music? - Listen to the tape then put the
- She reads three times a week. statements in the correct orders.
- How often does Ly go joging? - Isolate the model sentences
- She listen to music twice a week. - Copy the notes in the notebooks and
- How often does she read? memorize.
- How often + do / does + s + V…?
- Once / twice / three times a week.
3. Practice: Substitution drillB5 on page
129: -Repeat the numbers (three, one,
- Three, one, two, four, five, seven. two……).
play badminton / three times - Three times.
- listen to music / twice
- go joging / once - Look at the pictures.
- play tennis / once - Listen to the teacher.
- watch TV / twice - Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- read / three times - Make the sentence for themselves.
- go to the movies / twice - Practice in pairs.
Get students to repeat the numbers (three, - Some pairs practice in front.
one, two……).- Three
+How often does Ly watch TV?
+ She watches TV twice a week.
- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.
4.Further practice: - Look at the board.
How often do Tim Name - Work in groups.
you..? es - Stand up and ask each orther questions.
…play football 3 Nam When they find someone who says “Yes”

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

time they fill in the name. They can’t fill in
s someone’s name more than once.
…go to the park - Tell the teacher what they have found,
…watch TV e.g. “ Nam plays football three tiomes a
…play badminton week ”.
…do homework
…read

5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize


- Adverbs of frequences. - Do homework as the teacher suggests.
- How much is it / are they ?
It is / They are ...................
Ask students to learn adverbs of
frequency.
E .Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /…… /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / … /
2013
62: …./ ….. / 2013
UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Period 77. Lesson 4: HOW OFTEN ? (C1-4)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students can understand details and use adverbs of frequency
correctly .Help students understand the details and practice adverbs of frequency with the
simple present tense.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: Always , Usually ,Often ,Sometimes , never
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson
Teacher’s and student’s activities Content

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Nought and crosses 1.Revision:
- Put the grid on the board. read play
- Divide class into teams. One is swim
books tennis
noughts (O) and the other is Crosses
do
(X). go to play
homewor
- Two teams choose any words in the school soccer
k
boxes and ask questions about
play
activities . listen to
watch tv badminto
- The team which has three noughts or music
n
three crosses on a line will win the
game.

2 .Pre - reading:
Elicit vocabulary Vocabulary:
- Use signs to introduce new words : Always (adv) : luôn luôn.
VVVV – VVV – VV – V – X. Usually (adv) : thường thường
Often (adv) : thường.
Sometimes (adv) : thỉnh thỏang
Never (adv) : không bao giờ
Slap the board + Checking vocabulary:
- Put the signs on the board. VVV
- Call two students of two teams to the VVVV
front of the class.
- Call out one of adverbs in English VV V
in loud voice.
Guessing meaning 3 .While reading:
- Ask students to use the pictures and
read the text to match the Vietnamese 1. thả diều = fly a kite.
with the new vocabulary in context. 2. cái lều = a tent
Grid 3. đi cắm trại = go camping
- Put the table on the board. 4. đi dã ngoại = have a picnic.
- Get students to reread the text then
complete the table. n o u
How so a
- Get students to share the answers e f s
often m l
with their partners. v t u
- Feed back zoo V
Answer given park V
- Ask students to ask questions and picnic V

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

answer: sports V
+ How often do they go to the zoo? camp V
+ They sometimes go to the zoo. school V
homewo V

kite V

Writing 4.Post reading:


- Have students write about activities I often go to the zoo. I neve........
in their free time using adverbs of …………………………………………………
frequency: always, usually, often, ………………………………………………
sometimes, never .
- Ask students to learn by heart 5.Homework:
advebs of frequency and “How often - Adverbs of frequency.
……………………?”. - How often …………………………?
- Have them prepare Unit 12 - Lesson I always / usually / often / smetimes..
6: (C5-6) : Reading and further Unit 12: Sparts And Pastimes HOW
practice in Vs/adv. OFTEN? - Lesson 6 : (C5-6)
E .Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
--------------------------------------
Date of preparation : …….. /… /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …… / … / 2013
62: …… / … / 2013
UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PASTIMES
Period78. Lesson 5: HOW OFTEN ? (C5-6)
A.Teaching aims:
At the end, students can understand the text and use adverbs of frequency more fluently
Present a short reading to understand the details and get further practice in Simple Present
tense, adverbs of frequency and vocabulary.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

3.New lesson :

Teacher’s activities Contents

Prediction 1. Revision:
- Explain the listening exercise and C5, page 132
introduce the content of this exercise. a) - never
- Let them listen to the cassette and match b) - sometimes
the adverbs with appropriate pictures as c) - often
requested. d) - often
- Let them listen again to correct their e) - usually
exercise.
2 .Pre - reading:
Elicit vocabulary Vocabulary:
Situation to wear clothes / boots : mặc quần áo/
mang giày .
Visual a stove : lò, bếp lò
Explanation overnight : qua đêm.
Brainstorm ride a bike
- Set up the sence: What do Minh and his have a picnic fly a kite
friends do on the weekend? play game
- Ask students to think of town and the Pastimes in the country
country. go to the
- Get them to go to the board and write mountain go camping
down their ideas. go to the river
- Give feedback.
2.While reading:
- Get students to read the text and check. - go walking in the mountains
- wear strong boots, warm clothes.
- take food, water and camping stoves
- camp overnight.
Lucky numbers Reading comprehension
- Write the numbers on the board. 1 2 3 4
- Divide class into teams. The teams take 5
turn to choose the numbers. 6 7 8 9
- Tell students that they have to answer 10
the questions . 1 - b What do they always wear?.
3 - f What do they take?
5 - c When does he go?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

6 - a What does Minh like doing?
8 - e Where does he often go?
10 - d Who does he usually go with?
2 – 4 – 7 – 9 : Lucky numbers
Transformation writing 4.Post reading: C6 , page 132
- Have students rewrite the text by I like walking. On the weekend, I………
changing “Minh” to “ I”.. …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………
…………………………………………………
………………………………………
- Ask students to learn by heart advebs 5.Homework:
of frequency and Simple present tense. - Adverbs of frequency and vocab.
- Have them prepare Unit 13 - Lesson 1: - Simple present tense.
(A1) : Seasons vocabulary with“weather Unit 13: Activities And The Season THE
like” WEATHER AND SEASONS Lesson 1 :
(A1)
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 27 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 28 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013
UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Period 79. Lesson 1: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A1-3)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know seasons vocabulary with “What’s
the weather like…….”.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
Jumbled words 1. Revision:
-Write numbers whose letters are in - oht = hot
disorder. - codl = cold
- Divide the class into two teams. - like = like

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Ask students from each team to go to the - whta = what
board and write the correct words .
Elicit vocabulary 2 .Presentation: +Vocabulary:
 Situation The spring : mùa xuân.
 picture The summer: mùa hè
 Situation The fall : mùa thu.
 Visual The winter : mùa đông.
 Situation The seasons : mùa.
 Explanation The weather : thời tiết
 Situation Warm (adj) : ấm áp.
 // Cool (adj) : mát mẻ.
Ordering * Checking vocabulary:
Write new words which are in wrong 3. The winter 8. the fall 7. cool
orders on the board. 4. warm 2. seasons 5. the spring
1. the weather 6. the summer
Presentation text + Target language:
- ask students to read the sentences in A1 What’s the weather like in the summer?
on page 134 to isolate the model It’s hot
senetences: - What’s the weather like ……………?
+ What’s the weather like in the - It’s ……………. . .
summer? - Thời tiết…………………ra sao?.
- Hỏi và trả lời về thời tiết .
Word cue drill 3. Practice:
- Run through the cues. - hot / summer - cold / winter
- Hold up the first cues and say the model - warm / spring - cool / fall
sentences.
- What’s the weather like in the summer?
- It’s hot in the summer.
Substitution Boxes 4. Further practice:
- Put students into four groups ( one for rice hot and moutain
each eason) an each group makes a poster. green river the night
- Example: morning warm yellow is
- In the spring beautiful cold evening
+The afternoon is warm but the evening cool trees blue weather
is cool. gray hot flowers
+ The rice is green. afternoon house tall very
+ The trees are beautiful.
5.Homework:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Ask students to learn seasons What’s the weather like ? It’s
vocabulary and how to talk about the ...................
weather. Unit 13: Activities And The Seasons –
- Have them prepare Unit 13 -- L5- A3: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS -
Talking about what weather you like. Lesson 2 : A3
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
--------------------------------------
Date of preparation : …….. /… /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …… / … / 2013
62: …… / … / 2013
UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Period 80. Lesson 2: THE WEATHER AND SEASONS (A4-5)
A.Teaching aims:
Help students know “ When” clauses in positive staemanets and “WH” questions.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up: Brainstorm
listen to music - Students to think of the town and
go for a walk fly a kite country.
watch TV - Go to the board and write down their
Pastimes idea.
play badminton
go swimming
play video games
- Set up the sence: What do Minh and
his friends do on the weekend?
2 .Presentation:Predict + Target
language: - Listen to the teacher.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

a. hot ? b. cold ? - Guess what Ba does in different weather.
c. cool d. warm ? - Students give their predictions.
-What+do /does+S+ do+ when it’s….? - Read the text.
Whenit’s…………,S +
V……………….. -Answer the teacher’s questoins.
- Give the form, meaning and use.
Set the scene: You are going to read a
short passage about Ba. Guess what Ba
does in different weather. (hot, cold,
cool and warm)
3. Practice: Word cue drill
- cold / go jogging - Look at the cues.
- hot / go swimming - Listen to the teacher.
- warm / go to the park - Repeat it chorally and then individually.
Run through the cues. - Make the sentence for themselves.
Hold up the first cues and say the model - Practice in pairs.
sentences. - Some pairs practice in front.
- What do you do when it’s cold?
- I go jogging when it’s cold.
- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes.
4. Further practice:
Transformation writing A4, page 136 - Students change the text about Ba and
a.When it’s hot, I …………… write about themselves.
When it’s hot, I ……………… - Swrap books, read their partners’ texts,
When it’s hot, I ……………… then write about What their partners do in
When it’s hot, I …………… different weather.
b. When it’s hot, he / she ………………
When it’s hot, he / she ………………
When it’s hot, he / she ………………
When it’s hot, he / she ………………
5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
-What +do /does+S+do+ when it’s…? - Do as the teacher suggests.
- When it’s ………, S + V…….
-Have them prepare Unit 13 –L4-B1:
Adverbs of frequency, Presnt simple…
E.Give experience.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
--------------------------------------
Date of preparation : …….. /… /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …… / … / 2013
62: …… / … / 2013
UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Period 81. Lesson 4: ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B1)
A.Teaching aims:
practice in adverds of frequency, simple present tense and sports vocabulary..
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Revision: Matching
- always vv - Look at the board.
- usually vvvv - Work in teams
- often x - Come up to the board then match items
- sometimes vvv in the left with items in the right.
- never v
Write adverbs of frequency and signs on
the board.
2 .Presentation: * Vocabulary:
to play basketball: chơi bóng rổ - Look at the picture and say the words in
Volleyball (n) : bóng chuyền English.
to go sailing: đi bơi thuyền
+ Target language: Presentation
pictures - Answer the teacher’s question
What do you do in the spring? + They often play volleyball in the spring.
They often play volleyball in the spring. - copy the notes in the notebooks and
-What+do /does+S+ do+ in + ……….? memorize.
- S + Adverbs + V +

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

…………………….
- …………làm gì vào……………?
- Hỏi ai làm gì vào mùa nào.. .
- Show the picture and ask students :
+ What do they do in the in the
spring?
3. Practice: Answer given
- We often go fishing in the fall. - Read the sentences.
They usually play volleyball in the - Listen to the teacher.
winter. - Repeat it chorally and then individually.
She sometimes flies a kite in spring. - Make the questions .
- He never reads books in summer - Practice in pairs.
- Put the sentences on the board. - Some pairs practice in front.
- Get students to ask questions and
answer.
+What do you do in the fall?
+ We often go fishing.
4. Further practice: Lucky numbers
1 2 3 4 5 - Look at the board.
6 - Work in teams.
7 8 9 10 - Take turn to choose the numbers.
11 12 - Listen to the teacher carefully.
1What ‘s the weather like in the winter? - Answer the questions.
2.What do you usually do in the fall?
3What do you usually eat in the winter?
5What’s the weather like in the spring?
7Where do you usually do in the sum…?
10What’s the weather like in the fall?
4 - 6 - 8 - 9 - 11 - 12 :
-5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
Ask students to learn seasons - Do as the teacher suggests.
vocabulary and how to talk about they
often do in seasons.
Have them prepare Unit 13 L5-
B2:Writing about activities you do in
different seasons.
E.Give experience.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 28 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 29 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013
UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND THE SEASONS
Period 82. Lesson 5: ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS (B2)
A.Teaching aims:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write their activities in different seasons
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up: Networks
Watch TV go fishing
read books Seasons - Students to think of the town and
country.
winter summer - Go to the board and fill in the
go jogging remaining empty circles with their own
do earobics have a picnic words.
- Write a network on the board and put
some more words below it.
2.Pre writing: Survey
U - Try to tell about their activities and ask
S s their friends about theirs.
e u - Practice with partners.
W Us - Tell the teacher what they have asked
N a a Usua
ea au their partner, e.g.“Hoai swims. She plays
a - l l-ly
- l- volleyball and table tennis………”
m - eat /
th ly Which season do you like? + Fall.
e s l drink
er do + What’s the weather like in the fall?
o y
n g + It’s cool.
o + Where do you usually go?
H F Co t go a + to the mountain
o al ol h ca picni
a l e mp c + What do you usually do there?
i m hot + I go camoing with my friends
o drink
u
- Let them practice with their partners:
+ What do you usually eat or drink?
+ We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot
drink.
- Feedback.
3. While writing: Write it up
Hoai like the fall when the weather is - Students write about the friends they
cool. She usually go campingin the have interviewed using 3rd person

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

mountain with their friends. They take a singular.
picnic and a lot of hot drink. - Write individually.
- Ask Students to write about the friends
they have interviewed using 3rd person
singular.
- Correct their mistakes.
4. Post writing:
- Correct their writings. - Share their writings.
- Choose some writing and correct on the - Write some on the board.
board.
5.Homework:
- Writing. - Take notes and memorize
- Ask students to write their activities in - Do as the teacher suggests.
their notebook.
- Have them do exercises in the workbook
from page 106 to 111 prepare Unit 14 – L1-
A1-3: “Going to” future.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Period 83. Lesson 1: VACATION DESTINATIONS (A1-3)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end,students might use “Going to” to talk about vacation plans.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………………
3.New lesson :

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up: Chatting
- What do you do in the spring? - Answer the teacher’s questions about
- Do you usually go camping? their activities.
- Where do you often go ? - Students – Teacher.
- Ask students some questions about their
activities in seasons.
- Teacher – whole class.
2 .Presentation: * Vocabulary:
- The summer vacation: kì nghỉ hè - Listen to the teacher.
- The citadel: thành nội. - Repeat after the teacher.
- to stay with someone: ở với ai……… - Notice the main stress pattern.
- Uncle: chú, bác. - Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Aunt: cô,dì.
- to visit: thăm viến. *Checking vocabulary:
*Checking vocabulary: Rub out and remember
Rub out and remember
Presentation dialogue A1 on page 140 - Students read the dialogue in A2 on
+ What is Ba going to do this summer page 116 again .
vacation? - Make the questions to isolate the model
+ I am going to visit Hue. sentence:
+ Where is he going to stay? -How much beef do you want?
+He is going to stay with his aunt and -How many eggs do you want?
uncle. + What is Ba going to do this summer
Form: vacation?
- Wh + be + S + going to + V…………? + I am going to visit Hue.
- S + be + going to + V + Where is he going to stay?
…………………… + He is going to stay with his aunt nad
- Be going to : sẽ. uncle.
- Diễn tả một hành động
- Ask them to play the roles of Ba and Lan.
- Ask students to isolate the model sentence
by Asking them some questions;
3. Practice: Answer given
- I am going to visit Hue. - Read the sentences.
I am going to stay with my aunt and - Listen to the teacher.
uncle. - Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- I am goig to stay there for a week. - Make the questions .

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- I am goig to visit the citadel. - Practice in pairs.
- Put the sentences on the board. - Some pairs practice in front.
- Get students to ask questions and answer.
+What are you going to do ?
+ I am going to visit Hue.
- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes.
4.Further practice: Mapped dialogue
Lan Mai
  - Look at the board and listen to the
-What / S.Vac? Ha Long teacher.
- Where / stay? Bay. - Repeat after the teacher.
- How long? a hotel. - Practice the dialogue in pair .
-What / do ? 2 weeks. - Some pairs practice in front.
- HCM city. Visit / beach - Rewrite the dialogue .
/ swim. And
you?
- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.
-5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Vocabulary. - Do as the teacher suggests.
+Wh + be + S + going to + V…………?
S + be + going to + V
……………………
- Have them prepare Unit 14 L2-A4-
5:Reading a text and sequencing words:
first, then, next, after that and finally.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Period 84. Lesson 2: VACATION DESTINATIONS (A4-5)
A .Teaching aims:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Reading a text about vacation plans to understand the details and practice “ going to”
future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that and finally.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up: Chatting
- What’s the weather like? - Answer the teacher’s questions about
- What weather do you like? their activities.
What are you going to do this summer - Students – Teacher.
vacation ?
2 .Pre - reading:Vocabulary: - Listen to teacher .
- The beach : bãi biển - Repeat after the teacher.
- a temple : đình miếu - Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- first (adv) : trước tiên - Copy in their notebook.
- Then (adv) : kế đó * Checking vocabulary:
*Checking vocabulary: Rub out and Rub out and remember
remember
Ordering
- Nha Trang - Listen to the teacher.
- HCM city - Guess where they are going to visit
- Ha Noi fisrt, then , next, after that and finally.
- Ha Long Bay
Hue
- Set the sence: Phuong and Mai are going
to visit the five places. Can you guess
where they are going to visit fisrt, then ,
next, after that and finally?
2.While reading: Grid - Read the text and check.
- First: Ha Long Bay.
Pla Whe H What - Then: Ha Noi.
ces re o -Next: Hue

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

w - After that: Nha Trang.
l - Finally: Ho Chi Minh City
o - Read the table on the board.
n - Read the text again and complete the.
g - Ask and answer the questions.
2 - Work in pairs.
with
Ha d Answer given
uncl visit Ha
Lo a - Ask students to ask questions and
e& Long Bay
ng y answer:
aunt
s + Where are they goig to visit?
3 + They are going to visit Ha Long Bay
Ha d + Where are they going to stay?
see Ngoc
No hotel a They are going to stay their uncle and
Son Temple
i y aunt
s
2
with d
Hu see the
frien a
e citadel
ds y
s
Nh 3
frien
a d Go to Nha
d’s
Tr a Trang
hous
an y Beach
e
g s
o
n
HC gran
e
M d- Visit grand-
w
Cit pare parents
e
y nt’s
e
k

4.Post reading: Transformation writing - Fill it with their own plans for the
- Have students use the same grid headings summer vacation .
but this time fill it with their own plans for - Write individually and then share with
the summer vacation. their partners.
- 5.Homework:Ask students to learn by - Take notes and memorize

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

heart vocabulary and Sequencing words. - Do as the teacher requests.
- Have them prepare Unit 14 - Lesson 3:
(B1-4) : Asking about others’ projects
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 29. Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 30 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013
UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Period 85. Lesson 3: FREE TIME PLANS (B1-4)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students can practice speaking more fluently using “Going to”
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: know, movie, match, …….. .
2.Grammar:
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: call 2 students to write the new words

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up * Warm up : Play with words: ( 4’)
T guides and asks sts to play - rtehaet  theater
P play - wtmororo  tomorrow
Correct the mistakes - tnogith  tonight
- rhmkoweo  homework
- denweke  weekend
2.Presentation B1. Listen and repeat.: (12’)
T guides and explains the new words * New words:
P copy and repeat many times see (v): nhìn, xem
T calls sts to read match(n) : chận đấu
P read know(v): biết
Correct the mistakes
T turns on a cassette player again
P listen and repeat many times T: What are you going to do tonight ?
T calls sts to read P: I am going to do my homework.
P read …………………………………..
B2.Prepare two dialogue with a partner:
T explains the way to practice (8’)
P listen and note a. A: What are you going to do tonight ?
T calls sts to practice B: I am going to see the movie.
P practice then write in their book A: What are you going to do tomorrow ?
Correct the mistakes B: I am going to go walking
b. tonight: help my mom.
Tguides and turns on the cassette Tomorrow : play volleyball.
player B3. Listen and read.: (10’)
P listen and note Question:
T call sts to practice What is Ba going to do on the weekend ?
P practice What is Ba going to see ?
Correct the mistakes Is Jurassic Park a good movie ?
T give some questions
P answer
Correct the mistakes
4. Consolidation: ( 2’)
Consolidation the the grammar
again.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Reading the dialogue B1
5. Homework: ( 2’)
Recomment sts to learn by heart
some vocabularies and the grammar.
Sts prepare “ Unit 14: B5,6
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Period 86. Lesson 4: FREE TIME PLANS (B5-6)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students can practice reading and listening practice with “going to”.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: bring, camera, photo, ………….
2.Grammar: Future simple tense.
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Read B1 again and translate into Vietnamese.
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Warm up * Warm up : Answer the questions: ( 3’)
T guides and asks sts to answer the 1. Do you have a picnic ?
questions 2. When do you go ?
P answer 3. What are you going to do on the weekend ?
2.Presentation B5. Listen and read: (9’)
T guides and turns on a cassette player bring (v) mang
P listen and note
T calls sts to read
P read
Corrects the mistakes
T guides and gives some questions

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

P listen and answer photo (n) bức ảnh
Correct the mistakes Questions :
3. Practice What is Minh going to do
T guides and explains the way to listen He’s going to bring some drinks
then turns on the cassette player What is Nam going to do ?
P listen and match the names with the He’s going to bring a camera.
right pictures What is Tuan going to do ?
T calls sts to answer He’s going to bring some food.
P answer B6. Listen.: (10’)
Correct the mistakes Vui  e,c
4. Consolidation: ( 2’) Lan  a
Consolidation the the grammar again. Nga  d
5. Homework: ( 2’) Ly  b
Recomment sts to learn by heart some Mai  d
vocabularies and the grammar.
Sts prepare “ Unit 14: C ”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Period: 87 Lesson 5: SUGGESTIONS (C1-3)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students can make suggestions .
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: bring, camera, photo, ………….
2.Grammar: Why don’t ……. What about ……… ?
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies: “camera, photo, bring”
Answer the question: What are you going to do next weekend .I am going to

61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1.Warm up * Warm up : Answer the questions: ( 3’)
T guides and asks sts to answer the 1. What are you going to do in the vacation ?
questions 2.Are you going to go to Huong Pagoda ?
P answer (If Yes)
Correct the mistakes 3. How are you going to travel ?
2.Presentation 1.New words (12’)
T guides and explains the picture pagoda (n) chùa
P listen idea (n) ý kiến
T explains some new words far : xa
P listen and copy then repeat many minibus (n) xe ô tô buýt
times 2. Grammar :
T calls sts to read - Let’s …….. = Let us + V
P read Ex: Let’s go to school
Correct the mistakes - What about + Ving + ……. ?
T guides and turns on a cassette player Ex: What about going to the zoo ?
P listen and note - Why + don’t/ doesn’t + S + V …… ?
T calls sts to read Ex: Why doesn’t she go to Hue ?
P read Because. It ‘s too far.
Corrects the mistakes
T guides and expalins some grammars
P listen and copy
T calls sts to read the dialogue C2. Answer : (9’)
3.Practice a. What does Nam want to do ?
T guides and asks sts to answer the He wants to go to Hue
questions b. What does Nga want to do ?
T calls sts to answer She wants to go to Huong pagoda.
P answer (practice in pairs) c. She wants to walk.
Correct the mistakes d. Because, It’s too far.
e. He wants to go by bike.
f. Because, it’s too hot.
g. He wants to go by minibus.
C3. Look at the picture.Work with a partner.:
T guides and explains the way to do (6’)
by the picture Ex: a. Let’s go to the beach
P listen and note What about going to beach
T asks sts to do by the picture Why don’t we go swimming ?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

P do b. Let’s go to the museum
Correct the mistakes What about going to the museum
Why don’t we go to the museum ?
C4. Remember.: (5’)
T consolidation the grammar again What ………. Do ?
P listen Let’s go ………..
T calls sts to give some examples What about ………. ?
P give some examples Why don’t we ……. ?
Correct the mistakes
4. Consolidation: ( 2’)
Consolidation the the grammar and
read some vocabularies again
5. Homework: ( 2’)
Recomment sts to learn by heart some
vocabularies and the grammar.
Sts prepare “ Grammar practice ”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 30 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013


TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến


Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 31 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /
……./2013
UNIT 14: MAKING PLANS
Period88. Lesson 6: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to produce language better
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: review from Unit1 to Unit14
2.Grammar: : Present simple tense, Present progressive tense, Future
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson:Writing some vocabularies: “pagoda, idea , far, minibus ”

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Answer the question: Why don’t you do your homework ?
61 : ..................................... 62: …………………….
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and studen’s activities Contents
1. Present simple tense : (6’)
T explains the grammar again S + V(s,es) + O
P listen and note then give some S + do / does + not + V + ………
examples Do / Does + S + V …………….?
Correct the mistakes Yes, S + do/does
No, S + do/does + not.
Ex: Do you like sports ?
Yes, I do
T guides and asks sts to repeat the 2.Adverbs of frequency : (7’)
grammar How often + do/does + S + V + O ?
P repeat the grammar S + adv + V(s,es) …………
Correct the mistakes Ex: How often do you go to school ?
T asks sts to do exercise I always go to school.
P do a. How often do you watch TV ?
Correct the mistakes I ………… watch TV
b.How often do you go to the movies? I
……….
T calls sts to rtepeat the grammar c.How often do you help your mum?I .. help
P repeat the grammar ….
Corrects the mistakes 3. Present progressive tense.: (6’)
T asks sts to do exercise S + be + Ving + ………
P do S + be + not + Ving + ……….
Correct the mistakes Be + S + Ving + ……… ?
Note: now, at the moment
T guides and asks sts to explain the Ex: What you (do) now ?
grammar What are you doing now ?
P explain 4. Future.: (8’)
Correct the mistakes S + be going to + V + ……..
T calls sts to practice S + be + not + going to + V +
P practice in pairs ……..
Correct the mistakes Be + S + going to + V + …….. ?
Note: tonight, tomorrow, next + t/g
T calls sts to complete the dialogue a. What are they going to do ?
P complete They are going to play soccer
Correct the mistakes

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

b. They are going to play tennis.
T asks sts to answer the questions * Complete the dialogue :
P answer the question Han: What are you going to do ?
Correct the mistakes Vui: I am going to visit Han Noi
……………………………
* Answer the question:
T asks sts to answer the questions a. What is Vui going to do ?
P answer She is going to visit Ha Noi
Correct the mistakes b.She is going to stay in a hotel.
c. She is going to stay for a week.
5. What is the weather like ?.: (6’)
T asks sts to give your plans next a. It’s warm in the spring.
summer vacation b. It’s hot in the summer.
P give plan c. It’s cool in the fall
Correct the mistakes. d. It’s cold in the winter.
.Consolidation: ( 2’) 6. Future plans.: (3’)
Consolidation the the grammar again a. I’m going to ………
. Homework: ( 1’) b. I’m going to ……..
Recomment sts to learn by heart some
vocabularies and the grammar.
Sts prepare “ Consolidation ”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
Period 89: ENGLISH TEST No4
A/ Aim: Helping students to review the Present Progressive tense, the time, prepositions of
position, vocabulary of subjects, adverbs of frequency, making suggestions.
B/ Language Focus:
The Future Simple tens,The Present Simple tense., Vocabulary of subjects.
C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.
D/ Procedure
1. Từ vựng:Chọn từ không cùng nhóm với từ còn lại.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ: Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu,chia dạng đúng của từ trong
ngoă ̣c.
3. Đọc hiểu: Đọc đoạn văn về chuyến dã ngoại.
4. Viết: Sắp xếp câu thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
B. Ma trâ ̣n
Tổn
Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng
Chủ đề g
TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
Phonetic
&Pronuciatio 4 4
n (1,0) (1,0)
L.Focus 8 5 13
(2,0) (2,5) (4,5)
Reading 5 5
(2,5) (2,5)
Writing 4 4
(2,0) (2,0)
26
Tổng 13 (4,5) 10 (3,5) 5 (2,5)
(10)
ĐỀ I
I.Hãy tìm ra và khoanh tròn một từ không thuộc cùng một nhóm nghĩa.(1,0 điểm)
1. A. hot B. cold C. weather D. warm
2. A. fishing B. soccer C. volleyball D. badminton
3. A. often B. always C. sometimes D. winter
4. A. Canada B. English C. China D. France
II.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0
điểm)
1.......................... she like sports ?
A .Do B .Does C. Is D. Are
2. We ..................... video game now.
A. is playing B. am playing C. are playing D. playing
3. How..................do you watch TV.
A. often B. sometimes C. usually D. never
4. They don’t go camping because they don’t have a………..
A. tent B.ten C.ball D. camera.
5. Mai ………. visit her friends tomorrow .
A. going to B. is go to C. is going to D.going
6 Phuong and Mai are going to stay ……... a week .

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

A. at B. on C. for D. in
7. It is very hot ………….. the summer .
A. on B. in C. at D. with
8. I’ d like …………..banana ,please.
A. any B. some C. a little D. much
III. Biến đổi từ trong ngoặc ở dạng thích hợp để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0 điểm)
1. Nam often (play ) ……… sports after school .
2. Let’s ( go) ……………… camping .
3. I’m going to (visit ) ……….Hue city this summer .
4. She (go ) ………….to the zoo .
IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (2,5 điểm)
Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The weather is fine and cold.
Thu is going to bring a camera to take some photos. Lan is going to bring some food. Nam
is going to bring some drinks.Minh is going to bring a blanket (cái mền )
1.Write True (T) or False(F ) ( 1,5 đ )
………………a .Thu and her friends are going to go camping in Sapa.
………………b. The weather is fine and cold.
………………c .Thu is going to bring some food .
b.Answer the question below. ( 1,0 đ )
1. Where are they going to have a picnic?
………………………………………………………………………………………………

2.Is the weather fine and cold?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…..
V.Sắp xếp câu sau thành câu có nghĩa (2.5 điểm)
1 . Swimming / is / we / when / go / it / hot? /
→…………………………………………. …………………………………………………
2. We / Ha Long Bay /why /to /don’t / go ?/
→……………………………………………………………………………………………
3.Lan going to / some / is / bring / food./

………………………………………………………………………………………………
4.He / goes /in / winter /the / fishing /never. /

……………………………………………………………………………………………….
ĐỀ II
I. Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi (2,5 điểm)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The weather is fine and cold.
Thu is going to bring a camera to take some photos. Lan is going to bring some food. Nam
is going to bring some drinks.Minh is going to bring a blanket (cái mền )
1.Write True (T) or False(F ) ( 1,5 đ )
………………a .Thu and her friends are going to go camping in Sapa.
………………b. The weather is fine and cold.
………………c .Thu is going to bring some food .
2.Answer the question below. ( 2,0 đ )
1. Where are they going to have a picnic?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…...
2.Is the weather fine and cold?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…..
II. I.Hãy tìm ra và khoanh tròn một từ không thuộc cùng một nhóm nghĩa.(1,0 điểm)
1. A. Canada B. English C. China D. France
2. A. fishing B. soccer C. volleyball D. badminton
3. A. hot B. cold C. weather D. warm
4. A. often B. always C. sometimes D. winter
III.Sắp xếp câu sau thành câu có nghĩa (2.0 điểm)
1.He / goes /in / winter /the / fishing /never. /

………………………………………………………………………………………………..
2 . Swimming / is / we / when / go / it / hot? /
→………………………………………….
………………………………………………….
3. We / Ha Long Bay /why /to /don’t / go ?/
→……………………………………………………………………………………………

4.Lan going to / some / is / bring / food./

………………………………………………………………………………………………
IV.Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C hoă ̣c D để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0
điểm)
1. I’ d like …………..banana ,please.
A. any B. some C. a little D. much
2. How..................do you watch TV.
A. often B. sometimes C. usually D. never
3. It is very hot ………….. the summer .

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

A. on B. in C. at D. with
4.......................... she like sports ?
A .Do B .Does C. Is D. Are
5. We ..................... video game now.
A. is playing B. am playing C. are playing D. playing
6. They don’t go camping because they don’t have a………..
A. tent B.ten C.ball D. camera.
7. Mai ………. visit her friends tomorrow .
A. going to B. is go to C. is going to D.going
8. Phuong and Mai are going to stay ……... a week .
A. at B. on C. for D. In
V. Biến đổi từ trong ngoặc ở dạng thích hợp để hoàn thành các câu sau(2,0 điểm)
1.I’m going to (visit ) ……….Hue city this summer .
2.Let’s ( go) ……………… camping .
3.She (go ) ………….to the zoo .
4.Nam often (play ) ……… sports after school .
ANSWERS
ĐỀ I
I . Khoanh tròn chữ cái trước từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn
lại(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 .C 2.A 3. D 4. B
II. Chọn và khoanh tròn đáp án đúng(mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B C A A C C B B
III. Hoàn thành dạng đúng của từ trong ngoă ̣c (mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
1 2 3 4
plays go visit goes
IV . Đọc đoạn văn sau đó trả lời câu hỏi ( mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
a.T /F
1. F 2.T 3. F
b.answer the question:
1. They are going to have a picnic in Sapa
2 .Yes ,it is .
V.Sắp xếp câu sau thành câu có nghĩa(mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm)
1.When it is hot ,we go swimming.
2.Why don’t we go to Ha Long Bay.
3.Lan is going to bring some food.
4 . He never goes fishing in the winter.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

5 .She likes cold weather .
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
Period 90. TEST CORRECTION.
A . Teaching aims
By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to know what they did in the test.Therefore they
get more experience to study better.
B.Teaching aids: board,cards,…..
C.Procedures:
T calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes, from big to small mistakes
- T asks Ss what they did in the test.What they did well and what they didn’t do
well.What they did but they didn’t know they are true or false.
- Calls on some excellent Ss to correct mistakes.
- T explains the mistakes for Ss.
- T corrects the mistakes ,from big to small mistakes.
Question I:
Some student’s choose not right.
Eg: 4.incorrect : Franch ->correct:English
Question II:
- There are many Ss choose exactly.
- Besides, there are some week Ss didn’t know how to choose right answers ,choose many
answer in the sentence.
Eg:4.ball ->correct : tent 8.any ->correct : some
Question III:
All of Ss know how to answer,so they did very well. Besides, there are some Ss do wrong
this exercise.
Ex: 1.incorrect : Let’s going ….. -> correct : Let’s go…….
2.incorrect :I’m going to visits ….. -> correct : I’m going to visit …..
Question IV:
There are some Ss know how to answer question paragraph,so they write very well.
Eg:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Although,there are some Ss didn’t know how to rewrite these sentences so they didn’t
write true.
Eg: incorrect: The weather is fine and cold ->correct : yes ,it is.
Question V:
Some students arrange the wrong sentences:
1.When is it hot,we swimming go ->correct : When it is hot ,we go swimming
2.He goes never fishing ……. ->correct : He never goes ……….
B.Homework:
Learning the grammar by heart and write the lesson in your notebooks.
Preparing “ Unit 15 A1.2.3 ”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 31 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 32 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /
……./2013
UNIT 15: COUNTRIES
Period 91. Lesson 1: WE ARE THE WORLD (A1,2,3)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to talk about countries, nationatities and languages.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:from,Canada,France,China, Japan, Britain,Australia , Nationality,language
2.Grammar: : Where ………….. from ?
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: no
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and studen’s activities Contents
1.Warm up * Warm up : Answer the questions: ( 3’)
T guides and asks sts to answer the 1. Are you from Ha Noi ? (if No )
questions 2. Where are you from ?
P answer Correct the mistakes 3. How many countries do you know ?
T guides and explains the picture 1.New words (18’)
2.Presentation from (prep) từ
T explains some new words Canada (n) Canada
P listen and copy then repeat many times France (n) Pháp
T calls sts to read China (n) Trung Quốc
P read The USA (n) Mỹ
Correct the mistakes Japan (n) Nhật
T guides and turns on a cassette player P Great Britain (n) Anh
listen and note Australia (n) Úc
T calls sts to read nationality (n) quốc tịch
P read language (n) ngôn ngữ
Corrects the mistakes 2.Grammar
T guides and expalins the grammar Note: + Laura + Maries
P listen and copy + Lee + John
T calls sts to read the text
P read
Correct the mistakes

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

+ Yoko + Susan
3.Practice + Bruce
T guides and turns on a cassette player * Form :Where + be + S + from ?
P listen and note S + be + from …………..
T calls sts to read Ex:Where are you from ? I am from Viet
P read Nam.
Correct the mistakes A2. Listen and read : (9’)
My name’s Minh
T guides and turns on a cassette player I’m from Viet Nam
P listen and note I speak Vietnamese
T explains the new word “Minh is from VN. He speaks Vietnamese”
P listen and copy then repeat many times A3. Listen and repeat.: (10’)
T calls sts to read ex: Japan  Japanese  Japanese
P read Australia  Australian  English
Correct the mistakes
T explains
P listen and note
4. Consolidation: ( 2’)
Consolidation the the grammar and read
some vocabularies again
5. Homework: ( 2’)
Recomment sts to learn by heart some
vocabularies and the grammar.
Sts prepare “ Unit 15 A4,5,6,7 ”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 15:COUNTRIES
Period 92. Lesson 2: WE ARE THE WORLD (A5,6)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to talk about countries, nationatities and languages.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:from wet ,a lot of ,tower,interesting

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

2.Grammar: : Where ………….. from ? Which language ……….. ?
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies: “ Canada, speak, language, from, China”
Answer the questions:- What’s your name ? My name’s ……….
- Where are you from ? I’m from ………
61....................................................... 62..............................................................
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and studen’s activities Contents
1. Warm up * Warm up : Play with words : ( 3’)
T guides and asks sts to play 1. erwtahe  weather
P play (write on the board) 2. itsiv  visit
Correct the mistakes 3. yaioitylnat  nationality
4. askpe  speak
2.Presentation 1.New words
T guides and explains the letter wet (a) ẩm ướt
T explains some new words a lot of : nhiều
P copy and repeat many times tower (n) cái tháp
T calls sts to read interesting (a) hấp dẫn, thú vị
P read 2.Grammar :
T guides and explains the grammar (1). What is …….. nationality ? S + be +
P listen and copy …
Ex: What is her nationality ?
She’s Vietnamese
2).Which language + do/does + S +
speak ?
S + speak(s) + …………………
3.Practice Ex: Which language do you speak ?
T explains the way to practice I speak Vietnamese
P listen and note Dialogue:
T asks sts to practice in pairs Thu : Who’s that ? Chi : That’s
P practice in pairs ………..
Correct the mistakes Thu : Where’s he/she from ?
T call sts to read the letter Chi : He/She’s from ………….
4. Consolidation: ( 2’) Thu : What’s his/her nationality ?
Consolidation the the grammar and Chi : He/She’s ……..
read some vocabularies again Now write a postcard to Nhan from Minh.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

5. Homework: ( 1’) Dear Nhan.
Recomment sts to learn by heart some I am on vacation in ……….…
vocabularies and the grammar.
Sts prepare “ Unit 15 B1,2,3,4,5 ”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 15: COUNTRIES
Period 93. Lesson 3: CITY, BUILDING AND PEOPLE (B1,2)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students will be able to talk about countries, nationatities and languages.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:from wet ,a lot of ,tower,interesting
2.Grammar: : Where ………….. from ? Which language ……….. ?
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies: “ Canada, speak, language, from, China”
Answer the questions:- What’s your name ? My name’s ……….
- Where are you from ? I’m from ………
61....................................................... 62..............................................................
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and studen’s activities Contents
1.Warm up * Warm up : Answer the questions:
Tguides and asks sts to answer the ( 3’)
questions 1. Is this building tall ?
P answer 2. Is that building tall ?
2.Presentation 3. Is this building tall or short ?
T explains some new words 1.New words(8’)
P listen and copy then repeat many population (n) dân số
times capital (n) thủ đô
T calls sts to read building (n) tòa cao ốc
P read meter (a) mét

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Corrects the mistakes high (a) chiều cao
T guides and expalins the grammar Malaysia (n) Mã Lai
P listen and copy Great Wall (n) Vạn Lý Trường Thành
T calls sts to read the sentence structure (n) cấu trúc
T guides and explains the picture over : hơn
P listen and note 2.Grammar :
T turns on a cassette player then Form: adj + er + N
explains some new words the + adj + est + …….
Ex: Where are you from ?I am from VN.
S + be + adj + er + than + O
S + be + the + adj + est + in/on + O
Ex: I’m taller than you
3.Practice You are the tallest in your family.
T guides and explains the picture * Note: big  bigger  biggest
P listen and note Questions:
Correct the mistakes a.Is Ha Noi bigger than HCM City? No, it
T asks sts to answer isn’t.
Correct the mistakes b.Which is the biggest city in the world ?
T consolidation the grammar again Mexico City is the biggest city in the world.
4. Consolidation: ( 1’) c.Which ic bigger, London or Tokyo ?
Consolidation the the grammar and Tokyo is bigger than London.
read some vocabularies again - How thick is the Great Wall ?
5. Homework: ( 1’) It’s over 9 metter thick.
Recomment sts to learn by heart some Remember.: (3’)
vocabularies and the grammar. ……. adj + er + N
Sts prepare “ Unit 15 C1,2 ”. ……. the + adj + est + …….
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........Duyê ̣t tuần 32 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013
TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến


Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 33 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /
……./2013
UNIT 15:COUNTRIES
Period 94. Lesson 4: CITY ,BUILDING AND PEOPLE (B3,4)

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students can understand the text and use comparatives fluently.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: high, long , thick ,a million ,over
2.Grammar: : How long ..............?
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies: “from wet ,a lot of ,tower,interesting ”
Answer the questions:- What’s your name ? My name’s ……….
61....................................................... 62..............................................................
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s and studen’s activities Contents
1.Revision: Nought and crosses 1.Nought and crosses
Hanoi Hue Sapa Hanoi Hue Sapa
HCMC Danang Hoi An HCMC Danang Hoi An
Haiphon Can Haiphon Can
Dalat Dalat
g Tho g Tho
- Put the grid on the board.
- Divide class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any words in the
boxes and ask questions about county
names +Hanoi is bigger than ………
- The team which has three noughts or +………… is hotter than ………
three crosses on a line will win the game.
2 .Pre - reading: Vocabulary: 2 .Pre - reading: Vocabulary:
T introduce vocabulary - high (adj) : cao
- Listen to teacher . - long (adj) : dài
- Repeat after the teacher. - thick (adj) : dày
- Notice the Vietnamese translation. - a million : triệu
- Copy in their notebook. - over (pre): hơn
+ Checking vocabulary: What and + Checking vocabulary: What and
where where
- Elicit the vocabulary from the students million
and write them in the circles.
- Get students to repeat the words long

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

including the rubbed out words by thick
pointing at the empty circle over

2.While reading: Comprehension questions:


Comprehension questions: B2, 3, 4 – page 159-161
B2, 3, 4 – page 159-161 - Read the text and check.
- a population: dân số Lucky numbers
- The capital: thủ đô - MEXICO CITY. - HCMC
- a meter: mét - TOKYO. - HANOI
- a structure: công trình kiến trúc - LONDON
- a kilometer: ki lo mét 1 2 3 4
1 Which is bigger: London or Tokyo? 5
2 Is Ha Noi bigger than HCMC? 6 7 8 9
4 Which is taller: Sears Town or 10
PETRONAS Twin Two?
6 Which is the biggest city in the world?
7 How long is the Great Wall?.
8 How high is the Great Wall?
10 How thick is the Great Wall?
3 – 5 – 9 : Lucky numbers
- Get students to read the text and check.
4.Post reading: Answer given - Ask and answer the questions.
- Mexico City - The Great Wall - Work in pairs
- 442 meters - HCMC
- Petronas Twin Towers - 12 million
- Ask students to ask questions and
answer:
+ Which is the biggest city in the
world?
+ Mexico City
+ How high is Sear Tower?
+ 442 meters.
-5.Homework: - Vocabulary. - Take notes and memorize
- Unit 15: Making Plans – NATURAL - Do as the teacher requests.
FEATURES - Lesson 5 : (C1 - 3) Ask
students to learn by heart vocabulary and
comparatives.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Have them prepare Unit 15 - Lesson 5:
(C1-3) : “Lot of ……”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 15:COUNTRIES
Period 95. Lesson 5: NATURAL FEATURES (C1 – C3)
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students can understand a lot of ……..” as a quantifier with Geography
vocabulary to describe Vietnam.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar: :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies
61....................................................... 62..............................................................
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Revision: Group works.
Slap the board - Say Engh
- Put English words on the board.
- Call two students of two teams to the front moutains
of the class. beautiful
- Call out one of the Vietnamese translation fields
in loud voice. beaches
rivers
lakes
2 .Pre writing: * Vocabulary:
- a forest (n): rừng - Listen to teacher .
- a desert(n): sa mạc - Repeat after the teacher.
- a lot of = lots = many:nhiều - Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- great (adj): to lớn
- to flow to : chảy ra
the sea (n): biển.
Tibet : Tây Tạng
- North Africa : Bắc Phi
*Checking vocabulary:Rub out and - Students repeat chorally and
remember remember all the English words.
-Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub - Call the English words and write the
out English words. English words if there is time.
- Get students to call the English words.
2 .Presentation:Presentation text
C1 on page 162 – 163 - Listen to the cassette and repeat.
we have lots of rain / the country very
green, we have big forest, a lot of lakes and - Some students read the text aloud and
rivers” answer:
LOTS OF / A LOT OF + C . NOUN / + mountains, rivers, lakes, rain,
UNC.NOUN. forests, beaches.
- Sau Lots of / a lot of là danh từ đếm được - Look at the picture of a desert and
hoặc không đếm được số nhiều.. answer the question : “Because we
- Show students the text and let them to the have lots of rain / the country very
cassette and repeat. green, we have big forest, a lot of lakes
- Ask some students to read aloud and ask and rivers”.
them: - Take notes and learn by heart.
+ What are there 6 natural pictures Lan
tells us about?
- Show them a picture of a desert and ask
them if they know why there isn’t a desert in
Viet Nam.
- Ask them to give the formation of “ a lot
of..”.
- Let students copy the models and the
formations, and memorize.
3. Practice: Picture drill - Look at the pictures.
a) mountains c) lakes - Listen to the teacher.
b) rivers e) forest - Repeat it chorally and then
d) rain f) beaches individually.
g) deserts - Make the sentence for themselves.
- Run through the pictures. - Practice in pairs.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Hold up the first picture and say the model - Some pairs practice in front.
sentences:
+What are they going to do?
+ They’re going to play soccer
- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.
3. Further practice:
* Comprehension questions: C3 - Read the text and check.
Lucky numbers
1 2 3 4 5 - Read the text carefully and answer
6 7 8 9 10 the questions.
2 Which is the longest river in VN? - Look at the board.
3 Where does the Mekong River star? - Work in teams.
4 Which is the highest mountain in the - Take turn to choose the numbers.
world? - Listen to the teacher carefully.
6Which is the longest river in the world?
7Which sea does the Nile River flow to?
8 Which is the highest mountain in the
world?
10 How thick is the Great Wall?
1 - 5 - 9 - 10 : Lucky numbers.- Get students
to read the text and check.
- Ask students to read the text carefully and
answer the questions.
5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Vocabulary. - Do as the teacher requests.
- Lots of / a lot of..
- Have them do Exercises from page 127 to
129 in the workbook and prepare Unit 16 -
Lesson 1: (A1&3) : Countable and
uncountable quantifiers.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Period 96. Lesson 1: ANIMALS AND PLANS (A1, A3)
A .Teaching aims:
Students can use countable and uncountable quantifiers a lot, a little, a few to talk about
Food.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar: :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies
61....................................................... 62..............................................................
3.New lesson :
Teacher’s activities Contents
1. Revision: Jumbled words
- toespota = potatoes -Look at the board.
- werflos = flowers - Listen to the teacher.
- gegs = eggs - Work in teams.
- motatoes = tomatoes - Go to the board and write the correct
- icer = rice words. (One word, one student).
- nonios = onions
- tableveges = vegetables
2. Presentation: Presentation picture
* Some / a lot of / a little / a few: - some eggs some rice
Some / a lot of / a few + Plural Noun - a lot of eggs a lot of rice
- a few eggs a little rice -
Some / a lot of / a little + Unc Noun
Look at what the teacher show and
- Some: 1 vaøi
notice the meaning as well as the usage
- A lot of: nhieàu
of the quantifiers some, a few, a little, a
- A few / a little: 1 ít
lot of.
- Lets students listen and repeat : some
- Listen and repeat
rice, a lot of rice, a little rice, some eggs,
- Take notes and learn by heart.
a lot of eggs, a few eggs
- Asks them to give the formation of “ a lot
of…………..”.
- Has them to take note.
3. Practice: Picture drill - Look at the pictures.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

a) a lot of potatoes - Listen to the teacher.
b) some tomatoes - Repeat it chorally and then
c) a lot of onions individually.
d) a few vegetables - Make the sentence for themselves.
e) a little rice - Practice in pairs.
f) some flowers - Some pairs practice in front.
g) deserts
- Runs through the pictures.
- Holds up the first picture and say the
model sentences: +How many potatoes are there?
- Does the same for the seccond picture. + There are a lot.
- Corrects their mistakes.
4.Further practice: Chain game
- a little rice - Look at the board
- some tomatoes - Get into groups of four or five.
- a few eggs - Listen to the teacher.
There’s a little rice. - Play games.
There’s a little rice and some
Tomatoes ………………………………
- Writes the phrases on the board.
- Asks students to get into groups of four
or five.
- Does the model.
5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Vocabulary. - Do as the teacher requests.
- Lots of / a lot of / a few / a little
- Has them prepare Unit 16 - Lesson 2:
(A2) : Reading a text about farming and
“a lot.”
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
Duyê ̣t tuần 33 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013
TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 34 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013
UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Period 97. Lesson 2: ANIMALS AND PLANTS ( A2 )
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students can understand the text and use a lot , a little, a few better.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar: :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies
61....................................................... 62........................................................
Teacher’s activities Contents
1.Revision: Nought and crosses - Look at the board.
2 1 - Work in groups.
a dozen a glass
potatoe 2 - One is noughts (O) and the other is
eggs
s of milk Crosses (X).
1 100g.Ri 4 kilos - Choose any words in the boxes, ask
kilo
2 ce vegetables and ask questions about country names

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

onions :
2 +There’s a little rice
1 kilo
tomatoe 2 flowers +There’re a lot of eggs.
fruit
s
- Puts the grid on the board.
- Divides class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).
- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
and ask questions about county names
2 .Pre - reading:Vocabulary: - Listen to teacher .
- a buffalo : con trâu - Repeat after the teacher.
- a cow : con bò - Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- to flow : chảy - Copy in their notebook
- North Africa : Bắc Phi * Checking vocabulary:Rub out and
* Checking vocabulary:Rub out and remember
remember
Open predictionA2 – page166
Mr Hai has: - Listen to the teacher.
1… 2…… 3…… 4…… 5…… 6…… - Guess about the text

Mr Hai produces:
1……2……… 3……… 4……… 5……… - Pedict 6 things Mr Hai has on his
- Sets the sence:You are going to read a text farm and 5 things he produces.
about Mr Hai’s farming.Now work in pairs
and guess about the text.
- Asks them to predict 6 things Mr Hai has
on his farm and 5 things he produces.
2.While reading: Grid
Mr Hai has:1.paddy fields 2. a small field 3. - Read the text and check.
fruit tree 4. buffulo 5. cows 6. chicken
Mr Hai produces: 1.rice 2. vegetables 3. - Read the text carefully and answer
fruit 4. milk 5. eggs the questions.
a a
Hai so
a - Read the table on the board.
has/grows/ l m f
little - Read the text again and complete the
produces o e e
t w table.
paddy fields V - Share their answer with their partners.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

rice V
vegetables V
fruit trees V
fruit V
animals V
buffalo V

4.Post reading: Board drill -Use the Grid above for cues.
- Asks ss to use the Grid above for cues for - Some pairs practice asking and
the drill answering before the class, using Wh –
- Runs through the cues. questions.
+ How many paddy fields does Mr Hai - Do some free practice with other
have? rivers and mountains in Viet Nam or
+ some others countries
+ How much rice does Mr Hai produce?
+ a lot
5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Asks students to learn by heart - Do homework as the teacher
vocabulary and A lot, a little, a few. requests.
- Has them prepare Unit 16 - Lesson 3:
(B1-) : reading a text about the
Environment..
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Period 98. Lesson 3: POLLUTION ( B1)
A .Teaching aims:
Reading a text about pollution for vocabulary and to understand ideas
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar: :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies
61....................................................... 62........................................................

Teacher’s activities Contents

1. Revision: Slap the board Group works.


Đốn hạ cây - Say Enghlish words .
- Run forward and slap the correct
words on the board.
mối nguy hiểm - Continue until students have slapped
đốt cháy all the words.
sản xuất
con vật
phá hủy
2 .Pre - reading:Vocabulary:
- the environment : môi trường
- The ocean = the sea: biển,đại dương - Listen to teacher .
- the air : không khí - Repeat after the teacher.
- trash : rác rưởi - Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- pollute : làm ô nhiêm - Copy in their notebook.
- power: năng lượng
- waste: phí phạm
*Checkingvocabulary:Ruboutand
remember
Pre Questions - Predict B1 – page 169 What are we destroying?
- Sets the sence: You are going to read a text 1. 2. 3.
about What we are doing to our environment. What are we wasting?
Guess the answers for the questions. 1. 2.
What are we polluting?
1. 2. 3. 4. .
2.While reading: Comprehension
questions: - Read the text and check.
What are we destroying?
1. forests 2. wild animal 3.plants
What are we wasting?
1. water 2. power
What are we polluting?

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1. the air 2. the land 3.the rivers
4. the oceans - Read the passage carefully
a) ..because we’re detroying the forest - Answer the questions in full
b) Gases are polluting the air. sentences, then copy the passage and
c) The pollution comes from gases and trash. the answers.
d) Trash is polluting the land, rivers ……
4.Post reading: Write it up
Don’t Destroy our Environment! - Use the Predict Pre Questions to make
Don’t destroy the forests. a lst of “Don’t”
Don’t destroy the animals. - Listen attentively.
Don’t destroy the plants
Don’t waste water. +What are we destroying?
Don’t waste power. (forest): Don’t destroy the foersts
- Asks students to use the Predict Pre +What are we wasting?
Questions to make a list of “Don’t’. (water): Don’t waste water.
- Gives the first two as an example:
5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Asks students to learn by heart vocabulary - Do as the teacher requests.
- Has them to prepare Unit 16 Lesson 5:
(B2)
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Period 99. Lesson 4: POLLUTION ( B2)
A .Teaching aims:
Reading a text about pollution for vocabulary and to understand ideas
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar: :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

61....................................................... 62........................................................

Teacher’s activities Contents

1. Revision: Slap the board Group works.


ñoán haï caây - Say Enghlish words .
- Run forward and slap the correct words
on the board.
moái nguy hieåm - Continue until students have slapped all
ñoát chaùy the words.
saûn xuaát
con vaät
phaù huûy
2 .Pre - reading:Vocabulary:
- the environment : moâi tröôøng
- The ocean = the sea: bieån, ñaïi döông - Listen to teacher .
- the air : khoâng khí - Repeat after the teacher.
- trash : raùc röôûi - Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- pollute : laøm oâ mhieåm - Copy in their notebook.
- power: naêng löôïng
- waste: phí phaïm, laõng phí
*Checking vocabulary:
Rub out and remember
Pre Questions - Predict B1 – page 169 What are we destroying?
- Sets the sence: You are going to read a 1. 2. 3.
text about What we are doing to our What are we wasting?
environment. Guess the answers for the 1. 2.
questions. What are we polluting?
1. 2. 3. 4. .
2.While reading:
Comprehension questions: - Read the text and check.
What are we destroying?
1. forests 2. wild animal 3.plants
What are we wasting?
1. water 2. power
What are we polluting?
1. the air 2. the land 3.the rivers
4. the oceans - Read the passage carefully
a) ..because we’re detroying the forest - Answer the questions in full sentences,

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

b) Gases are polluting the air. then copy the passage and the answers.
c) The pollution comes from gases and
trash.
d) Trash is polluting the land, rivers ……
- Gets students to read the text and check
- Has them to answer the questions in full
sentences then copy in their notebooks –
the passage and answers .
Why are wild animals and plants in
danger?
4.Post reading: Write it up
Don’t Destroy our Environment! - Use the Predict Pre Questions to make a
Don’t destroy the forests. lst of “Don’t”
Don’t destroy the animals. - Listen attentively.
Don’t destroy the plants
Don’t waste water.
Don’t waste power. +What are we destroying?
Don’t pollute the air. (forest): Don’t destroy the foersts
Don’t pollute the land. +What are we wasting?
Don’t pollute the rivers. (water): Don’t waste water.
Don’t pollute the oceans.
- Asks students to use the Predict Pre
Questions to make a list of “Don’t’.
- Gives the first two as an example:
5.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
- Asks students to learn by heart - Do as the teacher requests.
vocabulary
- Has them to prepare Unit 16 - Lesson 5:
(B4,5) : Should / Shouldn’t.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 34 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Hoàng Thế Hiến

Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 35 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013
UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Period 100. Lesson 5: POLLUTION ( B4,5 )
A .Teaching aims:
Help students know how to give advice using should / shouldn’t for giving about the
environment
B. Language contents:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1.Vocabulary:
2.Grammar: :
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies
61....................................................... 62........................................................
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1 .Presentation: * Vocabulary:
-a trash can = a waste basket:thuøng raùc Listen to teacher .
- to put: ñaët, ñeå - Repeat after the teacher.
- a lot of = lots = many: nhieàu - Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- great (adj): to lôùn - Copy in their notebook.
* Checking vocabulary
:Rub out and remember
2 .Presentation:
Rub out & remember dialogue B4 page - Practice saying the dialogue.
171 - Remember te rubbed out words and
Lan : We shouldn’t leave our trash. keep practicing it.
Ba: What are these going to do? - Repeat the rubbed out dialogue from
Nga: Put it in a trash can memory.
Nam: There aren’t any trash cans. - Isolate the model sentence.
Lan:Then we should put it in a bag and take it - Listen to the teacher and answer the
home questions
Should/ Shouldn’t + Vinfinitive - Take notes.
- Neân / khoâng neân. - Points to the model sentence and ask :
- Duøng ñeå ai ñoù + What shouldn’t we do?
- Sets the scene: Phuong and Thu are talking + What should we do?
about food and drink. .
3. Practice: Word cue drill - Look at the cues.
- waste / save / water - Listen to the teacher.
- waste/ save / power - Repeat it chorally and then
- burn / collect / paper individually.
- leave / put it in the the trash can / trash - Make the sentence for themselves.
- damage / grow / trees - Practice in pairs.
- cut down / grow / forests - Some pairs practice in front.
- Runs through the cues.
- Holds up the first cues and say the model

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

sentences.
S1: We Shouldn’t waste water.
S2: We should save water..
- Does the same for the second cue.
- Corrects their mistakes.
4.Homework: - Take notes and memorize
Asks students to learn by heart vocabulary and - Do as the teacher requests.
“Should / shouldn’t”
Has them to prepare Unit 16 Lesson 6:
GRAMMAR PRACTICE.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
UNIT 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Period: 101 .Lesson 6 :GRAMMAR PRACTICE
A .Teaching aims:
At the end, students will able to practice in Present simple and progressive, comparatives
and superlatives, Quantifiers and countability: countries, natural features, Farming and
environment vocab.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: review
2.Grammar : Present simple and progressive
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook, easy talk
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson: Writing some vocabularies
61....................................................... 62.......................................................

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

1.Countries and language with Present


simple tense: - Students to think of the town and
country.
France Japanese - Go to the board and fill in the

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

China the world French remaining empty circles with their own
words.
countries language
Japan
Vietnam Chinese
Vietnamese
Page 174:
+ S1: I ‘m from Japan and I speak - Students use the Brainstorm to play
Japanese. game.
+ S2: Are you from China? + I’m from Japan.
+ S1: No, I’m not. + I speak Japanese.
+S3: Do you speak Japanese? - The rest of the class asks him or her
+ S1: Yes, I do. question to find which country and
+S4: Are you from Canada? language he or she chooses.
+ S1: No, I’m not.
Guessing game..
2. Adj: Comparatives and superlatives
- P 175 - Tell again te form of comparatives .
a/ longer – the longest + Adj + ER
b/ the longest + The + Adj + EST
c/ the tallest – taller – the tallest
d/ biggest – bidder – the biggest – - Give the answers.
the biggest
3.Present simple and present progressive:
Mapped dialogueGM2 - page 174 - Look at the board and listen to the
Thu Chi teacher.
  - Repeat after the teacher.
- What/ name? Susan - Practice the dialogue in pair .
-Where / live? London - Some pairs practice in front.
-Whe/staynow? Ha Noi. - Rewrite the dialogue .
-What/ do? teacher
- What / teach? English
- teach / you? No / Mr Hai

4. A few, a little, a lot / lots of:


GM4 - page 175 - Reimind how to use a few, a little
a lot a little a few ……
a lot lots a lot - Fill in the blank.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Gap fill
Calls ss to remind how to use a few,a little,a
lot of…
- Asks students to find in the blank with a
few, a little ……
5. Intergrated iterms of grammar and
vovabulary Lucky numbers
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 - Look at the board.
2 Name 2 things we should do to save our
environment - Work in teams.
3 Name 4 vegetables we grow in VN.
4 Name 3 farm animals. - Take turn to choose the numbers.
6 Name 4 natural features there are in VN.
7 What’s the second biggest city in VN? - Listen to the teacher carefully.
8 Name 2 langueges that you speak.
10 Name 2 countries you would like to visit. - Answer the questions.
1 - 5 - 9 : Lucky numbers
3.Homework: - Review vocabulary and Grammar
.Asks students to review vocabulary and points (Unit12 – Unit14) and exercises
Grammar points (Unit 9 –Unit15) and in the exercise book from Unit 12 to
exercises in the exercise book from Unit 9 to Unit 14 .
Unit 15 . Prepare THE 2ND TERM
ND
- Has them to prepare THE 2 TERM EXAMINATION
EXAMINATION
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
Period: 102 REVISION
A .Teaching aims:
Review some basic knowledge from Unit 9 – 15 ( Suhch as Simple present, present
progressive tense, comparatives, superatives, Let’s …………….).
B. Language contents:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

1.Vocabulary: review
2.Grammar : review
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook.
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson:
Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
1. Be going to:(seõ) - Tell tell “ be going to” : meaning, use
Dieãn tả moät döï ñònh trong töông lai and form.
( tomorrow, next) - Look at the board.
S + am / is / are + going to + Vinf
Ex: I’m going to visit Hue this summer -
Lets students tell “ be going to” :
meaning, use and form.
- Gives an example.
2. Present simple tense:
Thì Hieän taïi ñôn dieãn taû moät thoùi - Remind the form ( Say clearly which
quen, moät hoaït độngthöôøng xuyeân sbjects go with I / we / you and they or
xảy ra ôû hieän taïi. he / she / it …………………… .
( often, usually, sometimes… - Pay attetion.

S + V (s / es ) - Take notes.
- Vinf : I / We / They / Plural nouns
- Vs / es : He/ she / it / singular nouns
* Ex: We go to school by car
She works carefully.
- Has students to remind the form of
present progressive tense.
- Gives 2 examples to illustrate.
3. Present progressive tense:
Thì Hieän taïi tieáp dieãn dieãn taû
moät haønh ñoäng ñang dieãn x ảy ra ôû - Remind the form and use.
hieän taïi. ( now, at the moment…)
- Take notes.
S + am / is / are + Ving
* Ex: I am playing soccer.
- Calls sts remind the form of present
progressive tense.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

- Writes it on the board.
- Gives an example.
5. How often…………?
:Thöôøng theá naøo ? - Tell some adverbsof frequency.
Adverbs of frequency: always, usually,
often, sometimes, never… . - Take notes.
* Ex: How often does she go to the zoo?
She usually goes to the zoo.
She goes to the zoo twice a month.
- Asks them to retell some adverbs of
frequency.
- Gives examples.
5. How much: (bao nhieâu) Hoûi giaù
How much is it / are they? - Listen to the teacher.
It is ……… / They are ……….
* Ex: How much is an ice-cream?
It’s 1.000 dong - Take notes.
How much are they?
They are 5.000 dong
Reminds how to ask and answer about
price
- Gives examples.
Homework:
- Vocabulary ( Unit 9 – Unit 15) - Listen carefully.
- Asks them to leanrt by heart main points - Take notes.
and vocabulary from Unit 9 to Unit 15.
- Has them to prepare revision (cont)
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........

Duyê ̣t tuần 35 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6


Date of preparation : …. /…. /2013 WEEK 36 Date of teaching 61 ,62: …. /


……./2013
Period 103. REVISION
A .Teaching aims:
Review some basic knowledge from Unit 9 – 15 ( Suhch as Simple present, present
progressive tense, comparatives, superatives, Let’s …………….).
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: review
2.Grammar : review
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook.
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson:
3.New lesson
Teacher’s activities Contents
6. Comparatives and superlatives:
* Comparatives:
Adjective + ER +
than……….. - Students give te form of comparatives
and superlatives.
* Ex: Nam is taller than I.
Minh is bigger than his father.
*Superlatives::
- Listen to the teacher and take notes.
The + Adjective + EST

* Ex:-Mexico is the biggest city in the


world.
-That is the smallest house
- Calls students to give te form of
comparatives and superlatives.
- Gives examples.
7. Suggestion: ( Chuùng ta haõy..)
Let’s + V inf - Remind how to suggest.
……………..
* Ex: Let’s go to Huong pogoda.
- Calls students to remind the suggestion
with Let’s
8. The weather and seasons* The weather - Answer the questions about the weather

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

What’s the weather like in…..? .
It’s ……….. .
* Seasons: - Spring – warm Ex:What’s the weather like in the fall?
- Summer - hot It’s cool in the fall.
- Fall – cool - Asks students about the weather in the
- Winter - cold seasons.

9. How much / many…………? Bao - Remind countable and uncoutable


nhiêu nouns.
How many + coutable - Give the way to use “ How much /
Noun…? many ..?”
How much +uncoutable
noun.? *Ex: - How many eggs are there?
A kilo.-Reminds countable and uncoutable There is one egg.
nouns. -How much meat do you need?
-Calls students to say again how to use
How much / many…?
10. To be: am / is / are
I am - Remind “To be”
He/ she / it is
We / you / they are
- Calls students to remind “to be “ and how
to conjugate.
Homework
- Asks them to leanrt by heart main points - Listen carefully.
and vocabulary from Unit 9 to Unit 15. - Take notes.
- Has them to prepare The Second Term
Examination.
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
Period 104 : REVISION (EXERCISE)
A .Teaching aims:

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

Students do some exercises to practice listening, reading and writing.
B. Language contents:
1.Vocabulary: review
2.Grammar : review
C. Teaching aids: lesson plan, textbook.
D. Procedures:
1.Warm up :
2.Old lesson:
3.New lesson:

Teacher’s activities Contents

I. GRAMMAR & VOCABULARY:


Choose the best option
1. Which sports ______ you like? - Read ten sentences and then complete.
a. do b. does c. are - Choose the best answers.
2. Mary always _______ carefully.
a. work b. tenth c. works
3. We don’t go camping because we don’t
have a _____ .
a. ten b. tenth c. tent
4. Tuan is going to stay there _____ 3 days.
a. visit b. visits c. to visit
5. Tuan is going to stay _____ Nha Trang
this summer. Correct in their paper.
6. Lee is from China. He speaks _____
a.Vietnamese b.Enghlish c. Chinese
7. How often does she read? __ a week
a. Vietnamese b. English c. Chinese
8. What’s the weather like in the fall?
It’s ________ .
- Asks students to do Gap fill
- Calls students to choose the best answers to
fill in the blank.
- Checks and corrects
II. READING: Read the passage and do
thexercise
Minh and his friends are going to visit - Read the passage and do the exercise.
Hue this summer vacation.They are going

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

there by trains. They are going to stay in a
hotel. They are going to stay there for a
week. They are going to visit Hue for 1st
three days. Then they are going to visit Ha
Noi.
A – Write True or False: - Give the answers.
T 1. Minh and his his friends are going to
visit Hue for first three days.
F 2. They are going to visit Nha Trang after
that. - Correct.
F 3. They travel by car.
T 4. They stay in a hotel. - Two students answer the questions
B – Answer the questions: (write the answers on the board)
1. Do Minh and his friends go by train?
2. How long are they going to stay?- Asks
students to read the passage and do the
exercise.
- Calls students to give True or False.
- Checks and makes sure.
- Calls two students to answer the questions.
- Checks and corrects
III. WRITING: Rewrite the passage below
by replacing italic words with the words - Listen carefully.
given.
Manh is going to visit (1) DaLat this - Write the paragraph by replacing the
summer vacation. He is going to go with his italic words.
(2) sister. They are going by (3) car. They are - One student goes to the board and
going to stay (4) with their uncle. They are writes down.
going to stay for (5) four days.
* Vung Tau, friends, bus, in a hotel, two. - Correct.
- Explains the request of writing.
- Guides how to write.
- Calls one student to the board and write
down.
- Checks and corrects.
* Homework:
- See again all units ( 9 – 15 ) esp, this - Listen.
exercise for the second exam - Take notes.

   Thanh Thach secondary school  


  Teacher : Tran Thi Thanh Nga - The English Lesson Plan 6

.- Says carefully
E.Give experience.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..........
---------------------------------------
Date of preparation : ….. /……. /2013 Date of teaching 61 : …. / …… /
2013
62: …./ ……. / 2013
Period 105. THE SECOND TERM EXAMINATION

(Đề thi và đáp án của phòng)

Duyê ̣t tuần 36 . Ngày ……. / ….. / 2013

TTCM

Hoàng Thế Hiến

   Thanh Thach secondary school  

You might also like